Hull B337 - Final Documentation For Entertainment System (Sent On 2-10-12)

VENDOR’S DATA BOOK
HULL B337
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
CUSTOMER : KEPPEL FELS LIMITED
CONTRACTOR: -
RICO (PTE) LTD

SINGAPORE
PHONE : 65-67458472 FAX : 65-67471151
CONTENTS
1.00) BILL OF MATERIAL
2.00) DRAWINGS
3.00)) TECHNICAL DATA
3.01) MARINE STABILIZED TVRO SYSTEM

SEA TEL MODEL 5004 – KU BAND
3.02) TV – FM – AM ANTENNA
NAVAL MODEL MARK 32ALC
3.03) ANTENNA CONTROL UNIT

SEA TEL MODEL DAC-2202
3.04) HIGH QUALITY CATV VSB RF MODULATOR

A2B ELECTRONICS MODEL EVA-210
3.05) PWER SUPPLY & BASE UNIT

A2B ELECTRONICS MODEL EPP-100 & EBU-100
3.06) 12-WAYS PASSIVE COMBINER

A2B ELECTRONICS MODEL ECO-12
3.07)) MULTI-SWITCH
TRIAX MODEL TMS 5 x 16P
3.08) TV AMPLIFIER
NAVAL MODEL A 3540
3.09) AM-FM-BI AMPLIFIER

NAVAL MODEL A 3560
3.10) OUT PUT FILTER

NAVAL MODEL OF 3581
3.11) POWER SUPPLY

NAVAL MODEL PS 3522
CONTENTS
3.00) TECHNICAL DATA
3.12) POWER SUPPLY AND AMPLIFIER

NAVAL MODEL PSA – 350
3.13) SWITCH MODE POWER SUPPLY

DHECN MODEL SKS-50-24
3.14) POWER PASS SPLITTER

PACIFIC SATELLITE MODEL 4202AP
3 15) DVD PLAYER

3.15)
SAMSUNG MODEL E350
3.16) DOUBLE ISOLATED TV/RADIO OUTLETS

NAVAL MODEL N1
3.17) TAP OFF

NAVAL MODEL TO4F
3.18) SPLITTER
NAVAL MODEL SP4F & SP2F
3.19) 47 INCH LED 3D TV RECEIVER

LG MODEL 47LW4500
4.00) CERTIFICATES
5.00) LOSS CALCULATION
6.00) FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST REPORTS
7.00) COMMISSIONING TEST (SAT) PROCEDURES

BILL OF MATERIAL
RICO PTE LTD 9/8/2012
Page -1 of 1
Set Code Listing
Set Code From HULL B337 - ENTERTAINMENT SYS To HULL B337 - ENTERTAINMENT SYS
Set Code : HULL B337 - ENTERTAINMENT SYS Category : AAA

Set Description : ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FOR B337
COP Description : As per quotation Q1100015-R0/JL
Set Details : 1.00)
SATELLITE TVRO STABILISED ANTENNA SYSTEM
====================================
01) 1 unit:
Sea Tel Model 5004 / 122004-024
European Quad System
S/NO: 500412173595
***************
Comprising of:-
01) 1 x 122221 General Assy
Built-in With:
a) 1 x 130921-1 60" Radome
Installed
b) 1 x 130394-1 Radome Hardware
Kit
Below Deck Unit

02) 1 x 125411-1 DAC-2202
S/NO: 5933
***********
03) 1 x 108929-2 Power Cord 110VAC
04) 1 x 109752-3 Power Cord 230VAC
05) 1 x 122741-1 Below Deck Kit
Comprising of:
a) 1 x 116676 Assembly Terminal
Mounting Strip
b) 1 x 1 111115-6, 6ft Cable Assy
F(M)-F(M)
(Abv items 2 - 5 are built into

PP2088C514-4 Proline Cabinet)
06) 1 x 123026 Customer Doc Kit

07) 1 x 121213 Envelope Test Data
(Enclosed)
03) 1 unit:
PP2088C514-4
Proline Cabinet, 2000X800X800 RAL 7035
c/w glazed door, swing frame, lifting eyes,
100mm mounting plinth.
Consisting of the following built-in items :-

- 8 x EVA-210 (102210.01)
VSB RF Modulator With Nicam
- 1 x EPP-100 (103100.02)
Power Supply 110/220VAC To
7.5VDC 2A For EVA-210
- 1 x EBU-100 (104100.01)
19 " Rack Chassis For Fitting 10
Page -1 of 1
Set Code Listing
Modules
- 8 x 500061.01
DC Cable For EVA-210
- 1 x ECO-12 (104400.01)
(Abv item will replace OC-16)
12 Ways Passive Combiner
- 1 x 300327/TMS 5x16P
16 Way Multiswitch For One Satellite
Position.
- 1 x Naval A3540 TV-Amplifier

(Band II-V) for Mark 32ALC
- 1 x 201825 A3560
AM-FM-B- Amplifier BNC
- 1 x 201840 OF 3581
Naval TV Output Filter BNC
- 1 x 201845 PS3522
Naval Switch Mode Power
Supply 90 - 264 VAC.
- 2 x 201171 PSA350-1
Naval AM/FM/TV Line Amplifier
- 1 x SKS-50-24
Switch Mode Power Supply
AC110 / 220 To 24V 2.5A
- 1 x PACIFIC 4202AP
Skycom Pacific 4202AP, 2 Way Splitter
(All abv items are built into

- 2 x Samsung Model E350/XS

DVD Player
(1 unit of the above replaces
Videocassette Recorder / Player)
S/NO: ZVFX1RMC500145Y
: ZVFX1RMC500212D
****************************
Comprising of:
01) 1 x Main Unit
02) 1 x Remote Control
03) 1 x VGA Cable
(The abv items built-into
Page -1 of 1
Set Code Listing
04) 1 x User Manual
04) 79 units:
Naval Model N1
TV/Radio Outlet IEC-type Double
Isolated (201503-l) each c/w
- 201501
N-Mounting Frame For N13 Surface Mount
- 9063-01 Mounting Box
05) Miscellaneous Accessories

======================
- 15 x Naval Model TO4F-12 (201552)
4-way 12dB Tap-off for Naval
Antenna Distribution
- 8 x Naval Model SP4F (201555)

4-way Splitter (shielded)
(1 unit of abv item is built into
- 9 x 201510/N75
Naval N75 Matching Resistor 75-Ohm
- 79 x F-CNTR-RG6
F-Connector for RG-6
- 53 x F-CNTR-RG11
F-Connector for RG-11/U
- 1 x Naval Model SP2F (201556)

2-way Splitter (Shielded)
(Abv item is built into PP2088C514-4
Proline Cabinet)
06) 1 unit:
LG Model 47LW4500 47"
Led 3D TV Receiver
S/NO: 106KCKJ47557
**********************
Comprising of :-
01) 1 x Remote Control with Batteries
02) 1 x Polishing Cloth
03) 2 x FPR 3D Glasses
04) 1 x Composite Cable
05) 8 x M4 x 12 Star-head Screw
06) 1 x CD Format User Manual
Std Unit Price : 0.00 Total Item Qty : 451

Item No. Model/Part No. Description Quantity
Page -1 of 1
Set Code Listing
1 SEA TEL 5004 SEA TEL 5004 (5004-14) EUROPEAN QUAD SYSTEM 1
2 PP2088C514-4 PROLINE CABINET 2000X800X800 RAL 7035 1
3 60715-148 FILTER FAN FL250 230V RAL7035 1
4 20715-002 THERMOSTAT W.SUPPORT RAIL 230V 1
5 00000-101 19" TERMINAL SUPPORT3U84HP RAL 7035 1
6 EVA-210 VSB RF MODULATOR WITH NICAM (102210.01) 8
7 EPP-100 POWER SUPPLY 110/220VAC TO 7.5VDC 2A (103100.02) FOR 1
EVA-210
8 EBU-100 19" RACK CHASSIS FOR FITTING 10 MODULES (104100.01) 1
9 500061.01 DC CABLE FOR EVA-210 8
10 ECO-12 12 WAYS PASSIVE COMBINER (104400.01) 1
11 TMS 5x16P 16 WAY MULTISWITCH (300327) FOR ONE SATELLITE POSITION 1
12 A3540 NAVAL TV-AMPLIFIER A3540 (BAND II-V) F/MARK 32ALC 1
13 A3560 201825 A3560 AM-FM-B- AMPLIFIER BNC 1
14 OF 3581 NAVAL OF 3581 OUTPUT FILTER BNC 1
15 PS3522 NAVAL SWITCH MODE POWER SUPPLY 100- 250VAC 1
16 PSA350-1 NAVAL PSA350-1 AM/FM/TV LINE AMP 2
17 SAMSUNG E350/XS SAMSUNG DVD PLAYER 2
18 N1 TV/RADIO OUTLET IEC-TYPE DOUBLE ISOLATED 79
19 201501 N-FRAME 201501 F/N13 SURFACE MOUNT 79
20 9063-01 MOUNTING BOX 79
21 TO4F-12 NAVAL TO4F-12 4-WAY 12DB TAP-OFF DISTRIBUTION 15
22 SP4F NAVAL SP4F 4-WAY SPLITTER (SHIELDED) 8
23 201510 NAVAL MATCHING RESISTOR 201510 (N75) 75 OHM F/MK22CA 9
24 F-CNTR-RG6 F-CONNECTOR F-CNTR-RG6 FOR RG-6 TWIST-ON TYPE 79
25 F-CNTR-RG11 F-CONNECTOR (CRIMPING TYPE) F-CNTR-RG11 FOR RG-11/U 53
26 LG 47LW4500 LG LED 3D TV RECEIVER 1
27 SP2F NAVAL SP2F 2-WAY SPLITTER (SHIELDED) 1
28 SKS-50-24 SWITCH MODE POWER SUPPLY AC110 / 220 TO 24V 2.5A 1
29 20118-710 EQUIP. SUPPORT SHELF 2U 250D RAL7035 8
30 PACIFIC 4202AP SKYCOM PACIFIC 4202AP, 2WAY SPLITTER 1
31 30118-299 19" BLANK PANEL 1U RAL 7035 1
32 30118-302 FRONT PANEL 19" 3 U RAIL 7035 1
33 10110-304/UNI06 6 WAYS PDU WITH UNIVERSAL SOCKETS 2
3M CABLE & 3-PIN PLUG RAL 7035
34 00000-101/BLA10 BLANK PLATE FOR SHUKO HEAD RAL 7035 1
DRAWINGS
TECHNICAL DATA
MARINE STABILIZED TVRO
SYSTEM
SEA TEL MODEL

5004 – KU BAND
Sea Tel 5004
3-Axis marine stabilized antenna system compatible
with Ku-Band satellites
2008 Data Sheet
The most important thing we build is trust
The Model 5004 TV-at-Sea Antenna Specifications

The Model 5004 is a 50” antenna that features can be enjoyed at sea, all at the touch of a • Min. EIRP: 41 dBW
high performance stabilization and satellite button. The 04 Series antennas are compatible • Dish Diameter: 1.27 m; 50 in
tracking using a 3-axis closed loop stabilization with the services provided by the industries
system, providing quality performance in the leading satellite companies like DirecTV™, DISH • Radome Diameter: 1.55 m; 61 in
roughest seas. The Model 5004 has a compact, Network™, Bell TV™, Hotbird, Sky, Orbit and • Radome Height: 1.67 m; 66 in
attractive all-white radome, DVB (Digital Video DirecTV Latin America (DLA)™.
• Antenna Weight (including radome): 95.3 kg; 210 lbs
Broadcasting) signal identification, and Sea
All Sea Tel DBS TV-at-Sea systems
Tel’s proprietary antenna control and fast-track • Antenna Stabilization: 3-axis closed loop
accommodate any number of satellite
signal lock software. It’s ready for multiple
receivers. Many TV sets may be installed • Stabilization Motors: Brushless (quiet) DC Motors
satellite reception and includes a two year
onboard, each receiving its own programming
warranty on parts, one year labor. • Built-In GPS Provides Automatic Satellite Acquisition
from its satellite receiver.
With Sea Tel’s patented antenna stabilization • Ship’s Motion: +/- 25º Roll and +/- 15º Pitch
system, the TV choices you enjoy at home • Roll & Pitch Response Rate: Unlimited
• Azimuth Range: 680 degrees
• Full Elevation Range: -15º to +120º
• Polarization Control: Automatic where required
• Tracking System: Dishscan (no rotating feed)
• More than 200 digital quality TV channels and over 30

channels of CD quality music.
• The 04 Series antennas are compatible with the services

provided by the industry’s leading satellite companies
like DirecTV™, DISH Network™, Bell TV™, Hotbird, Sky,
Orbit, Sky Mexico and DirecTV Latin America (DLA)™.
• All Sea Tel DBS TV-at-Sea™ systems accommodate any

number of satellite receivers. Many TV sets may be
installed onboard, each receiving its own programming
from its satellite receiver.
• Unmatched stabilization accuracy allows the system to

detect the slightest motion that may affect the antenna’s
connection and correct as needed.
• 2-year warranty on parts; 1-year labor.
• Ready for multiple satellite selection.
• Euro version is HD ready/ US version requires the HD

converter (DirecTV 110w)
For further information please contact:

Cobham SATCOM Marine Systems
U.S.A. Tel: +1 925-798-7979
Sea Tel’s patented three-axis satellite tracking system U.S.A. Fax: +1 925-288-1420
provides more reliable TV reception, even in rough waters. U.S.A. Toll Free: +1-888-798-7979
With signal loss due to antenna movement reduced to U.S.A. E-mail: seatel@cobham.com
nearly zero, the performance of the Sea Tel three-axis EUROPE Tel: +44 2380 671155
system is comparable to a fixed antenna on shore! EUROPE Fax: +44 2380 671166
EUROPE E-mail: seatel.eurosales@cobham.com
126897_B 10/08 www.cobham.com/seatel

AGC MARINE Telecom
Z.I. Les Trois Moulins – EURO 92 – 282, rue des Cistes
06600 ANTIBES
FRANCE
Tél. : +33 (0)4 92 91 96 08 – Fax : +33 (0)4 93 74 47 51 – E-Mail : info@agcmarine.com
Sea Tel
Model 5004
With Sea Tel's patented antenna stabilization system and optional Touch Screen Controller, the TV choices you enjoy at home can b e
enjoyed at sea, all at the touch of a button. The Model 5004 is a 50" antenna that features high performance stabilization and satellite
tracking using a 3-axis closed loop stabilization system, providing quality performance in the roughest seas. The Model 5004 has a
compact, attractive all-white radome, DVB (Digital Video Broadcasting) signal identification, and Sea Tel's proprietary antenna control and
fast-track signal lock software. It's ready for multiple satellite reception and includes a two year warranty on parts, one year labor.
 Min. EIRP: 40.5 dBW

 Dish Diameter: 1.2 m; 48 in
 Radome Diameter: 1.5 m; 60 in
 Radome Height: 1.7 m; 66 in
 Antenna Weight: 103.4 kg; 228 lbs
 Antenna Stabilization: 3-axis closed loop
 Stabilization Motors: Brushless (quiet) DC Motors
 Built-In GPS Provides Automatic Satellite Acquisition
 Ship's Motion: +/- 25º Roll and +/- 15º Pitch
 Roll & Pitch Response Rate: Unlimited
 Azimuth Range: 680 degrees
 Full Elevation Range: 0º to 90º
 Polarization Control: Automatic where required
 Tracking System: Dishscan (no rotating feed)
 More than 200 digital quality TV channels and over 30 channels of CD quality music.
 Easy to use optional touch screen controller with built-in test functions ensure proper system operation and troubleshooting.
 The 04 Series antennas are compatible with the services provided by the industry's leading satellite companies like DirecTV™,
DISH Netowrk™, Bell ExpressVu™, Hotbird, Sky, Orbit and DirecTV Latin America (DLA)™.
 All Sea Tel DBS TV-at-Sea™ systems accommodate any number of satellite receivers. Many TV sets may be installed onboard,
each receiving its own programming from its satellite receiver.
 Unmatched stabilization accuracy allows the system to detect the slightest motion that may affect the antenna's connection and
correct as needed.
 2-year warranty on parts; 1-year labor.
 Ready for multiple satellite selection.
 HD ready
SARL au Capital de 30 500 Euros – SIRET 412 962 755 00036 – Identification TVA FR 09 412 962 755 – APE 518J
INSTALLATION AND OPERATION MANUAL
FOR SEA TEL MODEL
SERIES 04 KU-BAND TVRO ANTENNA
WARNING: Antenna Pedestal must be properly restrained (stowed)

to prevent damage to wire rope isolators, isolator springs and/or
antenna pedestal mechanism during underway conditions when power
is removed from the antenna assembly.
Sea Tel, Inc. Sea Tel Europe

4030 Nelson Avenue Unit 1, Orion Industrial Centre
Concord, CA 94520 Wide Lane, Swaythling
Tel: (925) 798-7979 Southampton, UK S0 18 2HJ
Fax: (925) 798-7986 Tel: 44 (0)23 80 671155
Email: seatel@seatel.com Fax: 44 (0)23 80 671166
Web: www.seatel.com Look to the Leader. Look to Sea Tel. Email: europe@seatel.com
Web: www.seatel.com
September 10, 2004 Document. No. 122595
Revision A
Sea Tel Marine Stabilized Antenna systems are manufactured in the United
States of America.
Sea Tel is an ISO 9001 registered company. Registration Number M2314 which
was first issued on November 09, 1998.
The Series 04 Family of Marine Stabilized Antenna Pedestals with DAC-2200

Antenna Control Unit complies with the requirements of European Norms and
European Standards EN 60945 (1997) and prETS 300 339 (1998-03). Sea Tel
European Union Declaration of Conformity for this equipment is contained in this
manual.
Copyright Notice
All Rights Reserved. The information contained in this document is proprietary to Sea Tel, Inc.. This
document may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without the consent of Sea Tel, Inc. The
information in this document is subject to change without notice.
Copyright © 2004 Sea Tel, Inc.
ii
Revision History
REV ECO# Date Description By
X N/A Initial PRELIMINARY Release MDN
A N/A September 10, 2004 Production Release MDN
iv
Series 04 Ku-Band TVRO Antenna Table of Contents
1. INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................. 1-1

1.1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM ................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2. GENERAL SCOPE OF THIS MANUAL.................................................................................................... 1-2
1.3. QUICK OVERVIEW OF CONTENTS ...................................................................................................... 1-2
2. OPERATION........................................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1. SYSTEM POWER-UP ........................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2. ANTENNA INITIALIZATION.................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.3. ANTENNA STABILIZATION ................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.4. ANTENNA PEDESTAL OPERATION ..................................................................................................... 2-1
2.5. TRACKING OPERATION .................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.6. ANTENNA POLARIZATION OPERATION ............................................................................................... 2-2
2.7. LOW NOISE BLOCK CONVERTER OPERATION.................................................................................... 2-2
2.8. RADOME ASSEMBLY OPERATION...................................................................................................... 2-2
3. BASIC SYSTEM INFORMATION ....................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1. SATELLITE BASICS........................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1. Ku-Band Frequency (10.95-12.75GHz) ........................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2. Signal level ....................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.3. Satellite Footprints............................................................................................................ 3-2
3.1.4. Satellite polarization ......................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2. ANTENNA BASICS ............................................................................................................................ 3-3
3.2.1. Azimuth ............................................................................................................................ 3-3
3.2.2. Elevation........................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.3. Antenna Reflector/Feed Assembly................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.4. Antenna polarization......................................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.5. Interchangeable LNBs...................................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.6. Stabilization ...................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.7. Search Pattern ................................................................................................................. 3-5
3.2.8. Tracking Receiver - Satellite Identification Receiver........................................................ 3-5
3.2.9. Tracking ........................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.10. Unwrap ............................................................................................................................. 3-5
3.3. COMPONENTS OF THE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION............................................................................... 3-6
3.3.1. Antenna ADE Assembly ................................................................................................... 3-7
3.3.2. Antenna Control Unit ........................................................................................................ 3-7
3.3.3. TSC-10 Touch Screen Controller (OPTIONAL) ............................................................... 3-8
3.3.4. Power Supply ................................................................................................................... 3-8
3.3.5. Satellite Receivers............................................................................................................ 3-8
3.3.6. Television/Monitor ............................................................................................................ 3-8
3.3.7. Matrix Switch .................................................................................................................... 3-9
4. INSTALLATION................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1. GENERAL CAUTIONS & W ARNINGS .................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2. SITE SURVEY .................................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.3. PREPARING FOR THE INSTALLATION................................................................................................. 4-2
4.3.1. Unpack Shipping Crates .................................................................................................. 4-2
4.3.2. The Installing Cables........................................................................................................ 4-2
v
Table of Contents Series 04 Ku-Band TVRO Antenna
4.4. PREPARING THE ADE FOR LIFT........................................................................................................ 4-2

4.5. ANTENNA PEDESTAL MECHANICAL CHECKS...................................................................................... 4-3
4.6. CABLE TERMINATIONS ..................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.6.1. At The Radome ................................................................................................................ 4-3
4.7. FINAL CHECKS ................................................................................................................................ 4-3
4.8. POWER-UP – OBSERVE THE ANTENNA ............................................................................................. 4-3
4.9. SETUP ............................................................................................................................................ 4-4
5. SETUP ................................................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1. OPERATOR SETTINGS ...................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2. OPTIMIZING TARGETING................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.3. OPTIMIZING AUTO-POLARIZATION .................................................................................................... 5-1
5.4. RADIATION HAZARD AND BLOCKAGE MAPPING.................................................................................. 5-2
5.5. DEFAULT SETUP PARAMETERS – SERIES 04 .................................................................................... 5-3
6. FUNCTIONAL TESTING..................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1. (OPTIONAL) TSC-10 TOUCH SCREEN CONTROLLER CHECKS ...................................................... 6-1
6.2. ACU / ANTENNA SYSTEM CHECK ..................................................................................................... 6-1
6.3. LATITUDE/LONGITUDE AUTO-UPDATE CHECK .................................................................................... 6-1
6.4. AZIMUTH & ELEVATION DRIVE .......................................................................................................... 6-1
7. TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE.................................................................................... 7-1
7.1. THEORY OF OPERATION .................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.2. INITIALIZATION SEQUENCE ............................................................................................................... 7-1
7.3. REPLACING OR CHANGING LNBS ..................................................................................................... 7-2
7.4. BALANCING THE ANTENNA ............................................................................................................... 7-3
7.5. OPEN LOOP SENSOR TESTING ......................................................................................................... 7-3
7.6. REFERENCE SENSOR TESTING ........................................................................................................ 7-4
7.7. OPEN LOOP MOTOR TESTING .......................................................................................................... 7-4
7.8. ANTENNA POSITION ERROR MONITORING ......................................................................................... 7-4
7.9. PEDESTAL CONTROL UNIT CONFIGURATION (XX04) .......................................................................... 7-5
7.9.1. Model Configuration Numbers.......................................................................................... 7-5
8. SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1. INSTALLED W EIGHT ......................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2. RADOME ASSEMBLY ........................................................................................................................ 8-1
8.3. STABILIZED PEDESTAL ASSEMBLY .................................................................................................... 8-1
8.4. PEDESTAL CONTROL UNIT (PCU) ASSEMBLY ................................................................................... 8-2
8.5. ANTENNA REFLECTOR/FEED ASSEMBLY ........................................................................................... 8-2
8.6. INTERCHANGEABLE LNB OPTIONS ................................................................................................... 8-2
8.6.1. Series 04-1 - US Circular LNB ....................................................................................... 8-2
8.6.2. Series 04-2 - KoreaSat Circular LNB ............................................................................. 8-3
8.6.3. Series 04-3 - DLA Circular LNB ..................................................................................... 8-3
8.6.4. Series 04-4 - Americas Circular LNB ............................................................................. 8-3
8.6.5. Series 04-12 - Aussat Linear LNB.................................................................................. 8-3
8.6.6. Series 04-13 - US Linear LNB........................................................................................ 8-4
8.6.7. Series 04-14 - European Quad Universal Linear LNB ................................................... 8-4
8.7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ......................................................................................................... 8-4
8.8. CONTROL AND IF COAX CABLES ...................................................................................................... 8-5
vi
Series 04 Ku-Band TVRO Antenna Table of Contents
9. DRAWINGS ......................................................................................................................................... 9-1

9.1. SERIES 04 TVRO SYSTEMS - PART NUMBER QUICK REFERENCE ..................................................... 9-1
9.2. SERIES 04 MODEL SPECIFIC DRAWINGS .......................................................................................... 9-2
9.3. SERIES 04 GENERAL DRAWINGS ..................................................................................................... 9-2
vii
Table of Contents Series 04 Ku-Band TVRO Antenna
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
viii
Series 04 Ku-Band TVRO Antenna Introduction
1. Introduction
1.1. General Description of system

This shipboard TeleVision Receive Only (TVRO) system provides you with maritime satellite TV programming
while you are inport or underway. Your Series 04 Antenna system will receive signals of adequately high
E.I.R.P. levels (see the Specifications section of this manual), in linear or circular polarization mode from any
of the geosynchronous TV satellites at Ku-band. This input will be distributed to all of your satellite TV
receivers which will provide the Audio/Video to your televisions. Many satellites also provide CD quality audio
programming which may also be routed to your stereo.
The Series 04 system is a fully stabilized antenna that has been designed and manufactured so as to be
inherently reliable, easy to maintain, and simple to operate. Except for start-ups, or when changing to
operate with different transponders or satellites, the equipment essentially permits unattended operation.
The Series 04 system consists of two major groups of equipment; an above-decks group and a below-decks
group. Each group is comprised of the items shown, and listed, below. All equipment comprising the Above
Decks is incorporated inside the radome assembly and is integrated into a single operational entity. For
inputs, this system requires only an unobstructed line-of-sight view to the satellite, Gyro Compass input and
AC electrical power. The IF signals from the antenna are distributed to the satellite receivers by the matrix
switch. Video and Audio outputs from your satellite receivers are available for distribution and monitoring.
Figure 1-1 Series 04 Simplified Block Diagram Components
1-1
Introduction Series 04 Ku-Band TVRO Antenna
For more information about these components, refer to the Basic System Information section of this manual.
A. Above-Decks Equipment (ADE) Group
1 Stabilized antenna pedestal with built-in GPS
2 Antenna Reflector
3 Feed Assembly with LNB
4 Radome Assembly
B. Below-Decks Equipment Group
5 DAC-2200 Antenna Control Unit
6 OPTIONAL TSC-10 Touch Screen Controller
7 2 or 4 input active Matrix Switch with desired number of outputs (one output to the ACU plus enough
outputs for the installed satellite receivers).
8 Satellite Video Receiver(s) & Television(s)
9 Control, RF and Video cables
1.2. General scope of this manual

This manual describes the Sea Tel Model xx04 Antenna (also called the Above Decks Equipment), its
operation and installation. The Below Decks Equipment is described in the manuals provided with your DAC-
2200 Antenna Control Unit and the TSC-10 Touch Screen Controller. Refer to those manuals for their
installation and operating instructions.
1.3. Quick Overview of contents

The information in this manual is organized into chapters. Operation, basic system information, installation,
setup, functional testing, maintenance, specifications and drawings relating to this TVRO Antenna are all
contained in this manual
1-2
Series 04 Ku-Band TVRO Antenna Operation
2. Operation
Operation of your system is accomplished from the DAC-2200 Antenna Control Unit (ACU) OR from the optional
TSC-10 Touch Screen Controller.
If your system includes the TSC-10 Touch Screen Controller, refer to the operation section of that manual. If your
system does not include the Touch Screen Controller, refer to the operation section of the DAC-2200 Antenna
Control Unit manual.
2.1. System Power-up

Turn ON the power switch on the front panel of the ACU. The Series 04 Antenna receives its DC power from
the DAC-2200 Antenna Control Unit (ACU) when the ACU is energized.
The ACU supplies +30 VDC and FSK Modulated RS422 at 70 KHz (TX) & 120 KHz (RX) to the ADE on the
Antenna Control Coax Cable.
2.2. Antenna Initialization

A functional operation check can be made on the antenna stabilization system by observing its behavior
during the 4 phases of initialization.
Step 1. Turn on the AC power switch at the ACU front panel. Verify the level platform motor drives the
level cage CCW to the stop and then CW 45 degrees.
Step 2. Verify the antenna moves forward or back to bring the top of the level cage to a level position in
the fore/aft direction. This step takes approximately 10 seconds and will result in the dish being at 45
degrees in elevation. The level cage may still be tilted left or right at this time.
Step 3. After the level cage is positioned in the fore/aft direction, verify the antenna moves left or right to
bring the top of the level cage to a level position in the left/right direction. This step also takes
approximately 10 seconds.
Step 4. After the level cage is positioned in the left/right direction, verify the antenna moves CW (up) in
azimuth to the upper stop where the Relative position of the antenna will be 700.0 degrees. From this
point on the encoder will increment and/or decrement the Relative position of the antenna. Next, the
antenna will drive CCW (down) in azimuth to a Relative position of 630.0.
The antenna will report its status, the PCUs model number & software version and the position information
(current Relative, Azimuth and Elevation ) to the DAC-2200 ACU.
If any of theses steps fail, or the DAC-2200 reports model number as "xx04" re-configure the PCU as
described in section the Setup section of the DAC-2200 manual. If initialization still fails, refer to the
diagnostics/troubleshooting in the Touch Screen Controller or the troubleshooting section of this manual.
2.3. Antenna Stabilization

After initialization is complete, real-time stabilization of the antenna is an automatic function of the PCU.
2.4. Antenna Pedestal Operation

Operation of the stabilized antenna Pedestal Control Unit (PCU) is accomplished remotely by the DAC-2200
Antenna Control Unit (ACU). Refer to the Operation section of the DAC-2200 Antenna Control Unit (and/or
TSC-10 Touch Screen Controller) manual for more specific operation details. There are no other operating
instructions applicable to the pedestal assembly by itself.
2-1
Operation Series 04 Ku-Band TVRO Antenna
2.5. Tracking Operation

Tracking optimizes the antenna pointing, in very fine step increments, to maximize the level of the satellite
signal being received. The mode of tracking used in this antenna is a variation of Conical Scanning called
DishScan. Tracking is controlled by the ACU. You can toggle Tracking ON/OFF from the ACU, or from the
optional Touch Screen Controller.
DishScan continuously drives the antenna in a very small circular pattern at 60 RPM. The ACU evaluates the
received signal throughout each rotation to determine where the strongest signal level is (Up, Right, Down or
Left) and issues the appropriate Azimuth and/or Elevation steps to the antenna, as needed.
The pedestal cannot control tracking. Refer to the ACU manual for more Tracking information.
2.6. Antenna Polarization Operation

Your feed is equipped with a polarization motor and potentiometer feedback. Therefore, it can be used for
Linear or Circular, by simply installing the correct (linear or circular) Low Noise Block converter (LNB).
There is a ½ wave length phase card installed in the feed assembly. This causes the received satellite linear
polarity to be mirrored/reversed in the feed. Therefore, to adjust polarization UP the LNB (as viewed from the
back side of the reflector) must rotate CCW and to adjust polarity DOWN the LNB must rotate CW.
When adjusting polarity UP (from the ACU), the displayed polarization value in the ACU will increment up.
When adjusting DOWN, the displayed polarization value in the ACU will decrement down.
When you have a circular Polarized LNB installed (like the US DBS LNB) there is no need to adjust the
polarization angle of the feed.
Refer to the maintenance section of this manual for procedures to change LNBs and optimize polarization
while in Auto-Pol mode.
2.7. Low Noise Block Converter Operation

There are no operating instructions or controls applicable to the LNB. This unit is energized whenever the
matrix switch and satellite receiver(s) have AC power connected to them.
Satellite signals are either circular polarized (spiraling plane down from the satellite) or linear polarized (fixed
plane down from the satellite). The pedestal will receive circular polarization signals when a circular LNB is
installed on the back of the dish. Conversely, the pedestal will only receive linear polarized signals when a
linear LNB is installed.
2.8. Radome Assembly Operation

When operating the system it is necessary that the radome access hatch (and/or side door) be closed and
secured in place at all times. This prevents rain, salt water and wind from entering the radome. Water and
excessive condensation promote rust & corrosion of the antenna pedestal. Wind gusts will disturb the
antenna pointing.
There are no other operating instructions applicable to the radome assembly by itself.
2-2
Series 04 Ku-Band TVRO Antenna Basic System Information
3. Basic System Information

This section provides you with some additional information about the satellites you will be using, basics of the your
Series 04 antenna system and other equipment within your system configuration.
3.1. Satellite Basics

The satellites are in orbit at an altitude of
22,753.2 Statute Miles positioned directly
above the equator. Their orbital velocity
matches the Earth’s rotational speed,
therefore, each appears to remain at a fixed
position in the sky (as viewed from your
location).
The satellites are simply relay stations that
are able to receive signals from one location
on the globe and re-transmit them to a much
larger area on the globe than a local TV Figure 3-1 Arc of viewable Satellites
Station antenna could do. Because of their
high vantage point, they are able to cover an area that is larger than a continent.
Your Series 04 antenna can be used with any of the Ku-Band (10.95-12.75GHz) satellites in this orbit that
have a strong enough receive signal level in your location. Your antenna is capable of Linear or Circular
signal reception, but requires that you have the appropriate LNB installed for the linear or circular signal
and for the specific frequency range of that satellite.
If you could see the satellites in their positions above the equator, they would appear to form an arc as
shown here (as viewed from a position in the Northern Hemisphere). When you are on the same longitude
as the satellite, its’ horizontal and vertical signals will be purely aligned to your horizon. When the satellite
is east or west of your longitude, the satellite signals will appear to be rotated clockwise or counter-
clockwise from pure horizontal and vertical. Both horizontal and vertical signals from a satellite will appear
to be rotated the same amount and are always perpendicular to each other. The amount of rotation is
dependent on how far east or west the satellite is from you and how close you are to the Equator.
3.1.1. Ku-Band Frequency (10.95-12.75GHz)

At these frequencies the signal from the satellite travels only in a straight line and is affected by weather
changes in the atmosphere. There are several conditions that can cause a temporary loss of satellite
signal, even within an area where the signal level is known to be adequate. The most common of these
normal temporary losses are blockage and rain fade. They will normally interrupt services only as long
as the cause of the loss persists.
Blockage - Blockage is loss due to an object in the path of the signal from the satellite to the dish. If an
object that is large and dense is positioned in the path of the signal from the satellite, it will prevent
sufficient signal from arriving at the dish. The signal can not bend around, or penetrate through, these
objects. The reception will be degraded or completely interrupted until the object is no longer in the path
of the signal to the dish. The dish is actively driven to remain pointed at the satellite (toward the equator)
so, as the boat turns a mast or raised structure on the boat may become positioned between the satellite
and the dish. Blockage may also be caused a person standing near the radome, tall mountains, buildings,
bridges, cranes or other larger ships near your boat. Signal will be lost when the boat is housed inside an
enclosure that the signal cannot penetrate, like a paint shed or a berth with a roof. Moving or rotating the
boat to position the antenna where it has an unobstructed view to the desired satellite will restore the
antennas ability to receive the satellite signal.
3-1
Basic System Information Series 04 Ku-Band TVRO Antenna
Rain Fade - Atmospheric conditions that may cause sufficient loss of signal level include rain, snow,
heavy fog and some solar activities such as sun spots and solar flare activity. The most common of
these is referred to as “rain fade”. Rain drops in the atmosphere reduce the signal from the satellite. The
heavier the rain, the greater the signal loss. When the amount of loss is high enough, the antenna will not
be able to stay locked onto the satellite signal. Once the amount of rain has decreased sufficiently, the
antenna will re-acquire the satellite signal. In strong signal areas, rain fall of about four inches per hour
will cause complete loss of signal. In weaker signal areas, lighter rainfall might cause the signal to be lost.
3.1.2. Signal level

The level of the receive signal on a point on the globe is dependant upon how powerful the transmission is
and how wide the signal beam is coverage area is. Focusing the signal into a narrower beam
concentrates its energy over a smaller geographic area, thereby increasing the signal level throughout that
area of coverage. This makes it possible for you to use a smaller antenna size to receive that satellite
signal. The antenna system must be geographically located in an area where the signal level from the
satellite meets (or exceeds) the minimum satellite signal level required for your size of antenna (refer to
you’re the Specifications section of this manual) to provide suitable reception. This limits the number of
satellites that can be used and the geographic areas where the boat can travel where the signal level is
expected to be strong enough to continue providing uninterrupted reception. When travelling outside this
minimum signal coverage area, it is normal for the system to experience an interruption in its ability to
provide the desired satellite services until entering (or re-entering) an area of adequate signal level (refer
to the satellite footprint information). Systems with larger diameter dish antennas can receive signal
further out to sea.
3.1.3. Satellite Footprints

The focused beam(s) from the satellites are normally aimed at the major land masses where there are
large population centers. Footprint charts graphically display the signal level expected to be received in
different geographic locations within the area of coverage. The signal will always be strongest in the
center of the coverage area and weaker out toward the outer edges of the pattern. The Drawing section
of this manual contains footprint charts of satellites that are expected to provide adequate signal level for
your size antenna. The coverage areas are intended to be a guide to reception, however, the actual
coverage area and signal level and vary. Also the signal strength is affected by weather.
3.1.4. Satellite polarization

Satellites may transmit their signals in one of two different
polarization modes, linear (like a flat ribbon down from the
satellite) or circular (like a twisted ribbon spiraling down
from the satellite). The series 04 antennas can receive
either linear or circular satellite signals, but not at the same
time.
The feed assembly installed on your antenna is designed to
be fitted with a linear LNB (to receive horizontal and vertical
linear polarized satellite transmissions) or a circular LNB
(to receive left hand or right hand circular polarized satellite
transmissions). A motor, which is controlled by the ACU
(Auto or Manual polarization), adjusts the “polarization”
angle of the LNB installed on the feed.
When you have a linear LNB installed on the back of the
dish (see the Maintenance section of this manual),
polarization adjustment is required to optimize the
alignment of the LNB to match the angle of the signal from
the satellite. Auto-Polarization mode of the ACU normally
will keep the polarization optimized for you. When you are
on the same longitude as the satellite, its’ horizontal and
vertical signals will be purely aligned to your horizon. When Figure 3-2 Satellite Signal Polarization
the satellite is east or west of your longitude, the satellite
3-2
signals will appear to be rotated clockwise or counter-clockwise from pure horizontal and vertical. Both
horizontal and vertical signals from a satellite will appear to be rotated the same amount and are always
perpendicular to each other. The amount of rotation is dependent on how far east or west the satellite is
from you and how close you are to the Equator.
When you have a circular LNB installed on the back of the dish (again see the Maintenance section of
this manual) no periodic polarization adjustments are required to optimized the satellite signal. However,
you will leave Auto-Polarization mode ON in the ACU.
3.2. Antenna Basics

The satellite dish is mounted on a three jointed pedestal. As your boat rolls, pitches and turns in the water,
these three joints move to keep the dish pointed at the satellite. The following information is provided to
explain some of the basic functions of the antenna:
3.2.1. Azimuth
The clockwise, or counter-clockwise, rotation of the antenna is called Azimuth rotation. The antenna can
rotate a total of 690 degrees between two mechanical stops. Azimuth drive, provided by the azimuth
motor, is required during stabilization, searching, tracking and unwrap operations of the antenna. As the
boat turns, azimuth is driven in the opposite direction so the dish remains pointed at the desired satellite.
The actual azimuth pointing angle to the satellite is determined by the ships latitude & longitude and the
longitude of the satellite. It is important to know that the antenna should be pointed (generally) toward the
equator.
If the ship is in the Northern Hemisphere, the azimuth angle to the satellite would be 180 degrees true
(relative to true north) if the satellite is on the same longitude as the ship. If the satellite is east or west of
your longitude, the azimuth will be less than, or greater, than 180 degrees respectively.
When checking for blockage you can visually look over the antenna radome toward the equator to see if
any objects are in that sighted area. If you are not able to find any satellites it may also be useful to
remove the radome top to see if the dish is aimed the correct direction (towards the equator).
3.2.2. Elevation
The antenna can physically be rotated in elevation from –15 degrees (lower stop) to +120 degrees (upper
stop). However, you will only be pointing elevation between 00.0 (horizon) and 90.0 (zenith). Elevation
drive, provided by the elevation motor, is required during stabilization, searching and tracking operations
of the antenna. The actual elevation pointing angle to the satellite is determined by your latitude &
longitude and the longitude of the satellite. In general terms, the elevation angle will be low when the ship
is at a high latitude and will increase as the ship gets closer to the equator.
Additionally, from any given latitude, the elevation will be highest when the desired satellite is at the same
longitude that you are on (refer to figure 3-1). If the desired satellite is east, or west, of your longitude the
elevation angle will be lower.
3.2.3. Antenna Reflector/Feed Assembly

Comprised of a hydro-formed aluminum reflector with a Cassegrain feed assembly. The feed assembly is
fitted with a polarization motor and a potentiometer for position feedback required for linear signal
operation. A variety of interchangeable LNBs can be easily fitted to the feed, allowing it to be used for a
linear or circular reception from a variety of satellites.
When a linear LNB is installed, the ACU automatically adjusts the feed by remotely controlling the 24 volt
DC motor, using the potentiometer feedback for Linear polarization position (Auto-Polarization mode).
When a circular LNB is installed, no polarization adjustment is required. The ACU automatically adjusts
the feed, as in linear operation, but the circular LNB receives the signal properly regardless of its
polarization position.
3-3
3.2.4. Antenna polarization

When you have a linear LNB installed the polarization needs to be periodically adjusted, Auto-Polarization
will automatically accomplish this for you. You do not need to adjust the “polarization” of the antenna
when you have a circular LNB installed, but rotation of the LNB does not have any detrimental effect, so
Auto-Pol should remain ON.
There is a ½ wave length phase card installed in the feed assembly. This causes the received satellite
linear polarity to be mirrored/reversed in the feed. Therefore, to adjust polarization UP the LNB (as viewed
from the back side of the reflector) must rotate CCW and to adjust polarity DOWN the LNB must rotate
CW.
Polarization adjustment to optimize Auto-Pol is required when initially setting up the system or after you
have installed a different LNB (refer to the Maintenance Section of this manual).
3.2.5. Interchangeable LNBs

Series 04 antenna can easily be fitted with a variety of LNBs. The feed is capable of receiving linear or
circular polarization signals, however, the LNB must match the type of polarization and the frequency band
of the desired satellite. You must also have the correct receiver(s) installed below decks to decode each
of the desired programming packages (as an example; To receive DirecTV in the US you must have
DirecTV receivers installed, but DirecTV Latin America programming requires different receivers). Refer
to the Maintenance section of this manual for the procedure used to change an LNB. The LNBs which
may be used with this system are:
US Circular LNB - Sea Tel PN: 115075-1. This LNB is used to receive DirecTV, Dish Network
or Bell ExpressVu programming.
KoreaSat Circular LNB - Sea Tel PN: 116910-1. This LNB is used for KoreaSat reception.
DLA Circular LNB - Sea Tel PN: 115075-2. This LNB is used to receive DirecTV Latin America
programming.
Americas Circular LNB - Sea Tel PN: 118685-2. This LNB is used to receive DirecTV
programming OR DirecTV Latin America programming. Two Tone Generators, mounted Below
Decks are required to control this LNB.
Aussat Linear LNB - Sea Tel PN: 115075-1. This LNB is used to receive Optus services in
Australia & New Zealand.
US Linear LNB - Sea Tel PN: 115075-1. This LNB is used to receive Sky Canada, Sky Mexico
and Sky Brazil programming.
European Quad Universal Linear LNB - Sea Tel PN: 122386. This LNB is very popular for
use in Europe. It can be used to receive low band horizontal & vertical AND/OR high band
horizontal & vertical linear services at the same time. It can be used to receive one high band
satellite or one low band satellite. Or it can receive both high & low band satellites at the same
time, as long as they are at the same longitude position. It can NOT be used to receive two
satellites at different longitude locations at the same time.
3.2.6. Stabilization
The Series 04 antennas are stabilized in three axes of motion. Stabilization is the process of de-coupling
the ships motion from the antenna. Simply put, this allows the antenna to remain pointed at the satellite
while the boat turns, rolls or pitches under it. To accomplish this, the Pedestal Control Unit (PCU) on the
antenna pedestal senses any motion of the antenna and immediately applies drive to the appropriate
motor(s) to oppose the sensed motion. Azimuth (AZ), Elevation (EL) and Cross-Level (left-right tilt) are
actively stabilized automatically by the PCU as part of its normal operation.
3-4
3.2.7. Search Pattern

Whenever the desired satellite signal is lost (such as when the antenna is blocked), the Antenna Control
Unit will automatically initiate a search to re-acquire the desired signal.
The search is conducted with alternate azimuth and elevation movements. The size and direction of the
movements are increased and reversed every other time resulting in an expanding square pattern.
When the antenna finds the desired satellite signal, the ACU will automatically stop searching and begin
Tracking the signal. Tracking optimizes the pointing of the antenna to get the highest signal level from the
satellite.
3.2.8. Tracking Receiver - Satellite Identification Receiver

The Satellite Identification Receiver located in the Antenna Control Unit (ACU) is used to acquire, identify
and track a specific satellite by a unique network ID code (NID). The receiver must be set up properly for
the satellite you wish to find & track. These receiver settings should be saved to expedite finding, or re-
acquiring, the desired satellite in the future.
When searching for a desired satellite, this receiver compares any satellite ID it finds to the saved satellite
ID code. If the ID code does not match the antenna will continue searching until the correct satellite is
found. The system must have adequate satellite signal level, AND the matching ID, to stop searching
(and continue tracking the desired satellite).
If you have the optional Touch Screen Controller (TSC-10) you can setup multiple “favorite satellites” and
subsequently switch to different “favorite” satellite with two touches on the main (home) screen.
3.2.9. Tracking
The Series 04 antenna actively optimizes the pointing of the dish for maximum signal reception. This
process is called tracking and is accomplished by continuously making small movements of the dish
while monitoring the level of the received signal. Evaluation of this information is used to continuously
make minor pointing corrections to keep the signal level “peaked” as part of normal operation.
3.2.10. Unwrap
Mechanical stops limit the azimuth rotation to a total of 690 degrees. The mechanical stops are at
Relative 020.0 and 700.0. When the azimuth rotation is within 3 degrees of either mechanical stop, the
antenna will be driven 360 degrees away from that stop. This “Unwraps“ (unwinds) the cables that are
routed through the pedestal assembly so that they do not become too severely twisted. It also repositions
the antenna to a point which is closer to the middle of its mechanical stops. UNWRAP should occur when
the Relative position of the antenna is at 023.0 or 697.0.
By rotating 360 degrees the azimuth position of the antenna will have returned to the previous Azimuth
position and will resume tracking the desired satellite. Unwrap will occur whenever the boat has turned far
enough in one direction for it to be required. It is normal for the satellite signal to be lost, and the
television picture to “freeze frame”, until the antenna completes unwrap and resumes tracking the satellite.
3-5
3.3. Components of the System Configuration

The following text provides a basic functional overview of the system components and component
interconnection as referred to in the simplified block diagram below. Also, refer to the appropriate page of
the System Block Diagram which depicts your system configuration for further detail.
Figure 3-3 Series 04 Simplified Block Diagram
The Series 04 system is comprised of two major sections: The Above-Decks Equipment (ADE) is
comprised solely of the Series 04 antenna radome assembly which is mounted outside, on the boats
upper deck or mast location. The Below-Decks Equipment (BDE) includes the Antenna Control Unit, may
include the optional Touch Screen Controller panel, satellite receiver(s), TV set(s) and all other ancillary
equipment that is mounted in various locations throughout the interior of the boat.
3-6
3.3.1. Antenna ADE Assembly

The Above Decks Equipment consists of an Antenna Pedestal inside a Radome assembly. The pedestal
consists of a satellite antenna dish & feed with a linear, or a circular Low Noise Block converter (LNB) with
polarization motor mounted on a stabilized antenna pedestal. The radome provides an environmental
enclosure for the antenna pedestal assembly
inside it. This keeps wind, water
condensation and salt-water spray off the
antenna pedestal assembly. This prevents
damage and corrosion that would shorten the
expected life span of the equipment.
The antenna control cable is connected
between the antenna radome assembly and
the antenna control panel. This cable
provides DC voltage to the antenna and all
control signals to and from the antenna.
Six RG-6 (or better) coax cables are
connected from the antenna radome
assembly to the below decks equipment.
One of these cables is the Antenna Control
Cable, which has the DC operating voltage
for the antenna and the antenna control
communication between the Antenna Control
Unit and the Pedestal Control Unit. Four Figure 3-4 Series 04 Above Decks Equipment
cables carry the intermediate frequency
(950-2050MHz) signals from the antenna assembly directly to the matrix switch and the DC Voltage &
Tone switching from the Matrix Switch to the a the LNB. All four are provided, even if you are only
currently using two for the LNB you presently have installed on your antenna. These cables ultimately
provide the input signal into the satellite receiver(s). And finally, one coax is installed as a spare.
3.3.2. Antenna Control Unit

The Antenna Control Unit allows the operator to control and monitor the antenna pedestal with dedicated
function buttons, LED’s and a 2 line display. The ACU and its Terminal Mounting Strip are normally
mounted in a standard 19” equipment rack. The ACU should be mounted in the front of the equipment
rack where it is easily accessible. The Terminal Mounting Strip is normally mounted on the rear of the
equipment rack. It is recommended that the antenna control panel be mounted near one of the Satellite
Receiver locations where you can see the television screen while you are controlling the antenna.
The Antenna Control Unit is connected to the antenna, ships Gyro Compass and to the optional Touch
Screen Controller (when included).
Figure 3-5 DAC-2200 Antenna Control Unit
The Antenna Control Unit (ACU) communicates via an 70/120 KHz full duplex data link with the Pedestal
Control Unit (PCU) located on the antenna. This control signal is sent up the Antenna Control Coax cable
along with the DC voltage for the antenna power. The Pedestal Control Unit stabilizes the antenna against
the ship's roll, pitch, and turning motions. The ACU is the operator interface to the PCU and provides the
user with a choice of positioning commands to point the antenna, search commands to find the satellite
signal and tracking functions to maintain optimum pointing.
3-7
3.3.3. TSC-10 Touch Screen Controller (OPTIONAL)

A Touch Screen Controller may be included in
your configuration. This allows the you to
control the antenna from a user friendly SVGA
graphic user interface panel.
Much of the ship, satellite, antenna and status
information can be viewed on the home display
of the panel. An external composite video input
is displayed in an inset window, which can be
expanded to full screen in a single touch. The
video input can be from one of your satellite
receivers or any other composite video source
(ie. computer, weather or navigation displays).
It allows you to setup several “favorite” satellites
and switch from one to another in a single touch Figure 3-6 TSC-10 Touch Screen Controller (OPTIONAL)
of the screen!
All other functions of antenna setup, operation
and even operator troubleshooting are also just a few touches away!
3.3.4. Power Supply

AC Voltage - An appropriate source of AC Voltage will also be required for the ACU, satellite receivers
and television monitors. Refer to the manuals for these devices for voltage and power consumption of
each. Total power consumption will depend on the number of satellite receivers and television monitors
used.
3.3.5. Satellite Receivers

The Series 04 system, with the appropriate LNB installed, can be used with standard European satellite
receivers, and Integrated Receiver-Decoders (IRD). Both can receive “free” programming, but an IRD is
required when the desired programming is encrypted. When authorized, it will decode the encrypted
signals for use. Authorizing the receiver-decoder is a process of registering your receiver(s) and paying
subscription fees to the service provider. The service provider then arranges for a signal to be sent
through the satellite to your receiver-decoder, which will “enable” it to decode the programming you
subscribed to.
A coax connection from the antenna (via the matrix switch) provides signal input to the receiver. The
receiver also outputs voltage and tone control to the matrix switch to select the correct band and
polarization signal for the channel you want to watch. A coax connection from the TV OUTPUT jack on
the satellite receiver is connected to the ANTENNA INPUT on the television. Alternately, individual
audio/video, Audio & S-Video, or SCART cable connections may be made between the satellite receiver
and the television.
3.3.6. Television/Monitor
An appropriate television monitor is used to view the satellite television programming and the on screen
displays from the receiver. Your television/monitor must be able to display the video standard outputted
from the satellite receiver. In some areas the satellite receiver may pass several different video formats,
depending on the program being watched. You may need a video standards converter for each
television/monitor which is not capable of displaying the signal being received (NTSC, PAL or SECAM
video input) “Multi-Standard” televisions/monitors are able to automatically display any of the major video
standard inputs. Consult your Television/Monitor manual for specifics.
3-8
3.3.7. Matrix Switch

The Matrix Switch routes the satellite signal from one of the IF cables to one of your receivers. As you
change channels on the satellite receiver, it uses the voltage, and/or tone, to select the correct signal input
for the channel you have selected.
Each output of the matrix switch is controlled by voltage, and/or tone, from the satellite receiver connected
to that output connector. Voltage level on the coax selects which polarity, Tone selects which band of
the input signals gets routed to that output connector, therefore, to that receiver. Each output of the matrix
switch operates independently of the others, therefore, allows the satellite receivers to operate
independently also.
The matrix switch is normally installed with the Below Decks Equipment. The antenna IF coax cables are
connected to its LNB inputs and a coax cable (RG-6 OR greater) is connected from one of its outputs to
each satellite receiver. One of these outputs must be connected the tracking receiver in the ACU.
Sea Tel recommends that an ACTIVE Matrix be used in all installations. Matrix switches with 4, 8, 12 and
16 outputs are available.
3-9
3-10
Series 04 Ku-Band TVRO Antenna Installation
4. Installation
Below are basic steps to guide you in installing this equipment, but you may choose to complete the installation
steps in a different order. Read this complete section before starting.
Installation of the DAC-2200 Antenna Control Unit and OPTIONAL TSC-10 Touch Screen Controller may have
already have been performed using their Installation and Operation manual instructions.
The following instructions describe the installation procedures for installing the Series 04 Antenna (ADE).
4.1. General Cautions & Warnings
CAUTION - Allow only an authorized dealer to install or service the your Sea
Tel Television Receive Only System components. Unauthorized installation or
service can be dangerous and can invalidate the warranty.
WARNING: Assure that all nut & bolt assemblies are tightened according the tightening
torque values listed below:
Bolt Size Inch Pounds
1/4-20 75
5/l6-18 132
7/16-14 376
1/2-13 517
NOTE: All nuts and bolts should be assembled using the appropriate Loctite thread-locker
product number for the thread size of the hardware.
Loctite # Description
222 Low strength for small fasteners.

243 Medium strength, oil tolerant.
262 Permanent strength for up to ¾” diameter fasteners.
271 Permanent strength for up to 1” diameter fasteners.
290 Wicking, High strength for fasteners which are already assembled.
4.2. Site Survey

The site survey is performed to decide where the best location for the equipment to be installed is. The
radome assembly (ADE) should be installed at a location aboard ship where:
1 The antenna has a clear line-of-sight to as much of the sky (horizon to zenith at all bearings) as
is practical.
2 The antenna is a minimum of 15 feet from the ship’s radar, especially high power radar arrays.
3 The antenna is not mounted on the same plane as the ship’s radar, so that it is not directly in the
radar beam path.
4-1
Installation Series 04 Ku-Band TVRO Antenna
4 The antenna is a minimum of 15 Feet from high power short wave transmitting antennas are not
in close proximity.
5 The antenna must be installed in a rigid mounting location that will not flex, or sway, in ship’s
motion or vibration.
6 The Above Decks Equipment (ADE) and the Below Decks Equipment (BDE) should be
positioned as close to one another as possible. This is necessary to reduce the losses
associated with long cable runs.
If these conditions cannot be entirely satisfied, the site selection will inevitably be a “best” compromise
between the various considerations. However, the warranty of the antenna will not cover physical or electrical
(RF) damage of the antenna due to the compromised location.
4.3. Preparing For The Installation
4.3.1. Unpack Shipping Crates

Exercise caution when unpacking the equipment crate(s). Carefully inspect the radome surface for
evidence of shipping damage.
4.3.2. The Installing Cables

Install appropriate cables from ADE to the BDE Location. Exercise caution during the cable installation to
assure that the cables are not severely bent (proper bend radius) or twisted and that connectors are not
damaged. Ensure that the cables have been run through watertight fittings and/or will not permit water
entry into the boat when the installation is completed.
4.4. Preparing the ADE for Lift

1 The antenna pedestal is shipped completely assembled in its radome.
2 Remove the shipping nuts which mount the ADE to the pallet.
WARNING: Hoisting with other than a webbed four-part sling may result in catastrophic
crushing of the radome. Refer to the specifications and drawings for the fully assembled
weight of your model Antenna/Radome and assure that equipment used to lift/hoist this
system is rated accordingly.
CAUTION: The antenna/radome assembly is very light for its size and is subject to large
swaying motions if hoisted under windy conditions. Always ensure that tag lines, attached
to the radome base frame, are attended while the antenna assembly is being hoisted to its
assigned location aboard ship.
3 Attach a four part web strap lifting sling to the four lifting pad eyes on the radome lip.
4 Using the web strap lifting sling arrangement, and with a tag line attached near the radome
base, hoist the antenna assembly to its assigned location aboard the ship by means of a suitably
sized crane or derrick.
5 The radome assembly should be positioned with the BOW marker aligned as close as possible
to the centerline of the ship. Small variations from actual alignment can be compensated with
the AZIMUTH TRIM adjustment in the DAC-2200, so precise alignment is not required.
4-2
Series 04 Ku-Band TVRO Antenna Installation
6 Bolt the radome base directly to the ship's deck or mounting plate (flat mounting area).
4.5. Antenna Pedestal Mechanical Checks

1 Open the radome hatch, or remove the top, to access the antenna pedestal.
2 Inspect the pedestal assembly and reflector for signs of shipping damage.
3 Remove the web strap shipping restraints from the pedestal. Save these straps to restrain
the antenna in the event that the AC power will be turned off while the ship is underway.
4 Cut and discard the large white tie-wraps from the pedestal.
5 Check that the antenna moves freely in azimuth, elevation, and cross level without hitting any
area of the interior of the radome.
6 Check that the antenna assembly is balanced front to back, top to bottom and side to side by
observing that it remains stationary when positioned in any orientation. (Refer to the
maintenance section of this manual for complete information on balancing the antenna).
7 Check that all pedestal wiring and cabling is properly dressed and clamped in place.
8 See cable terminations section below.
4.6. Cable Terminations

The cables must be routed from the above-decks equipment group through the deck and through various
ship spaces to the below-decks equipment group. When pulling the cables in place, avoid sharp bends,
kinking, and the use of excessive force. After placement, seal the deck penetration gland and tie the cables
securely in place.
CAUTION: Rough handling, tight bending, kinking, crushing and other

careless handling of the cables and their connectors can cause severe
damage.
4.6.1. At The Radome

The coax cables must be inserted through the cable strain relief(s) at the base of the radome. Apply RTV
to the strain relief joints and tighten the compression fittings to make them watertight. The cables are
color coded for easy connection identification. (Refer to the System Block Diagram for cable color
assignment).
4.7. Final Checks

Double check all your work and do a good visual inspection. Rotate the antenna in azimuth to assure rotation
is free and there is no binding or fouling in the cables you installed. Rotate the antenna in elevation and
Cross-Level to assure that the pedestal moves freely and that there is no binding.
4.8. Power-Up – Observe the Antenna

When all the hardware and cables have been installed, have someone turn the ACU power ON. This will
energize the antenna and it will begin Initialization. Observe initialization of the antenna to verify that each
phase of the initialization is completed satisfactorily (refer to Initialization Sequence in the Maintenance
section of this manual).
Close and fasten the radome hatch. Assure that the radome hatch is closed and secured when entry
into the radome is no longer required.
4-3
Installation Series 04 Ku-Band TVRO Antenna
4.9. Setup
Refer to the Setup information in the next section of this manual. If your system includes the Touch Screen
Controller, refer to the Setup chapter in the TSC-10 manual to actually setup the ACU. If your system does
not include the Touch Screen Controller, refer to the Setup instructions the DAC-2200 manual to assure that
the ACU settings and parameters are set correctly.
4-4
Series 04 Ku-Band TVRO Antenna Setup
5. Setup
Below are basic steps to guide you in setting up the ACU. Assure that the Antenna Pedestal (ADE) has been
properly installed before proceeding. If your system includes the OPTIONAL Touch Screen Controller, refer
to the Operation & Setup chapters in the TSC-10 manual to setup the ACU.
5.1. Operator Settings

Refer to the Operation chapter of the ACU manual to set the Ship information. Latitude and Longitude should
automatically update when the GPS engine mounted on the antenna pedestal triangulates an accurate
location, but you may enter this information manually to begin. You will have to initially enter the current
heading of the ship after which the Gyro Compass will keep the ACU updated.
Then set the Satellite information for the satellite you will be using. The receiver settings are especially
important.
After the Ship and Satellite setting have been made you should be able to target the desired satellite.
Continue with the setup steps below to optimize the parameters for your installation.
5.2. Optimizing Targeting

Ensure that all your Ship & Satellite settings are correct. Target the desired satellite, immediately turn
Tracking OFF and record the Antennas Azimuth and Elevation positions (Calculated Position) when it finishes
targeting. Turn Tracking ON, allow the antenna to “Search” for the targeted satellite and assure that it has
acquired (and peaks up on) the satellite that you targeted. Now, record the Antenna Azimuth and Elevation
positions while peaked on the targeted satellite (Peak Position). Subtract the Peak Positions from the
Calculated Positions to determine the amount of Trim which is required. Refer to the ACU manual Setup
information for instructions on how to key in the required value of Elevation Trim. Continue with Azimuth trim,
then re-target the satellite several times to verify that targeting is now driving the antenna to a position that is
within +/- 1.0 degrees of where the satellite signal is located. EXAMPLE: The ACU targets to an Elevation
position of 30.0 degrees and an Azimuth position of 180.2 (Calculated), you find that Peak Elevation while ON
your desired satellite is 31.5 degrees and Peak Azimuth is 178.0. You should enter an EL TRIM value of –1.5
and an AZ TRIM of +2.2. When completed, record the optimized TRIM settings in the “My Parameters”
column of the default parameters setup table.
5.3. Optimizing Auto-Polarization

While peaked on your targeted satellite, assure that you are in Auto-Pol (POL TYPE = 0072) and set one of
your satellite receivers to view its signal level display. Go to the POL OFFSET parameter in the Setup menu
of the ACU. Default setting is 0030 and may be incremented, or decremented to adjust polarization while in
Auto-Pol mode. Each increment equals one degree of polarization rotation (0038 = +8 degrees), decrement
below 30 for minus polarization (0022 = -8 degrees). Adjust as needed to get the highest signal level (and
best signal quality) on your satellite receiver (refer to your satellite receiver manual for how to view the signal
level and quality). When completed, record the optimized POL OFFSET setting in the “My Parameters”
column of the default parameters setup table.
5-1
Setup Series 04 Ku-Band TVRO Antenna
5.4. Radiation Hazard and Blockage Mapping

The DAC-2200 can be programmed with ship relative azimuth limits to enhance operation where there are
known blockage regions. Tracking and auto Search are suspended when the antenna is pointed within this
region to speed signal re-acquisition when the ship turns and the antenna comes out of signal blockage. The
BLOCKED condition is displayed in the TRACKING window. AZ LIMIT 1 is the Lower Relative AZ limit for
pattern blockage mapping. AZ LIMIT 2 is the Upper Relative AZ limit for pattern blockage mapping.
The DAC-2200 also provides a contact closure to ground on the SW1 terminal (J3-11) on the Terminal
Mounting Strip when the antenna is pointed within the blockage region or the system is searching, targeting
or unwrapping. The contact closure is a transistor switch with a current sinking capability of 1 Amp. This
signal can be used to control dual antenna coax switches to select IF signal connections from a second
antenna when the primary antenna is blocked.
Programming instructions:
Determine the Relative AZ limits that cause signal blockage by monitoring the REL display readings or by
graphing the expected blockage pattern. The Relative angles are with respect to the Pedestal reference,
which is normally pointed at the bow (360.0 Relative). In a dual cable-wrap antenna system, one of the
antennas may be pointed aft so its relative limits will be with respect to aft. The relative angles must be in the
range of 0 to 360 degrees (0000-3600). Convert the relative readings to limit values by multiplying by 10.
Enter the beginning of the blockage region as AZ LIMIT 1 and the end of the region (clockwise direction from
AZ LIMIT 1) as AZ LIMIT 2.
EXAMPLE: A drill ship has two antennas mounted in the front of the ship with a derrick blocking the
antenna’s view to the rear. The Port antenna is mounted referenced to the bow and is blocked from 160 to
175 degrees. The Starboard antenna is mounted reference to the stern and is blocked from 355 to 375
degrees relative to the stern. (375-360=015).
The limits for the port antenna are: The limits for the starboard antenna are:
AZ LIMIT 1 = 160 x 10 = 1600 AZ LIMIT 1 = 355 x 10 = 3550
AZ LIMIT 2 = 175 x 10 = 1750 AZ LIMIT 2 = 15 x 10 = 0150
Note: The AZ LIMITS of the starboard antenna are entered as 355 to 375 degrees. This defines a blockage
zone of 20 degrees. If the limits were entered as 015 to 355, the blockage zone would be 340 degrees.
5-2
Series 04 Ku-Band TVRO Antenna Setup
5.5. Default Setup Parameters – Series 04

The following table shows the factory default parameters for the DAC-2200 interfaced to a Series 04 Antenna
PCU. When the installation & setup of your system is finished you can record the “optimized” settings for
your system in the “My Parameters” column. Refer to the Setup Flow-Charts and individual parameter setting
information in the Setup section of your DAC-2200 manual for how to enter/change the parameters.
PARAMETER Ku DishScan My Parameters

EL TRIM 0
AZ TRIM 0
AUTO THRES 100
EL STEP SIZE 0
AZ STEP SIZE 0
STEP INTEGRAL 0
SEARCH INC 10
SEARCH LIMIT 100
SEARCH DELAY 30
SYSTEM TYPE 77
GYRO TYPE 1, 2, 36, or 362
POL TYPE 72
POL OFFSET 30
POL SCALE 90
AZ LIMIT 1 0
AZ LIMIT 2 0
5V OFFSET 0
5V SCALE 0
TX POLARITY 2
5-3
Setup Series 04 Ku-Band TVRO Antenna
5-4
Series 04 Ku-Band TVRO Antenna Functional Testing
6. Functional Testing
If not already ON, Turn ON the Power switch on the front panel of the ACU.
6.1. (OPTIONAL) TSC-10 Touch Screen Controller Checks

Refer to the functional testing chapter of the TSC-10 manual for check to perform.
6.2. ACU / Antenna System Check

1 Press RESET on the ACU front panel to initialize the system. Verify the display shows "SEA TEL INC
- MASTER" and the ACU software version number. Wait 10 seconds for the display to change to
"SEA TEL INC - REMOTE" and the PCU software version number. If the display shows "REMOTE
INITIALIZING”, wait approximately 2 minutes for the antenna to complete initialization and report the
Antenna Model and PCU software version. If “REMOTE NOT RESPONDING" is displayed, refer to
the Troubleshooting Section of this manual.
2 Press the NEXT key repeatedly to display the Ship, Satellite, Antenna and Status menu displays.
This verifies that the displays change in the correct response to the keys.
6.3. Latitude/Longitude Auto-Update check

This verifies that the GPS antenna mounted on the antenna pedestal is automatically updating the current
ship’s position information. If the GPS is not updating the ACU properly, refer to the Troubleshooting Section
of this manual.
1 Press the NEXT key repeatedly to display the Ship menu. Press ENTER to access edit mode and
view the current Latitude value.
2 Press the LEFT arrow key to bring the cursor up under the ones digit, press UP and then hit ENTER.
The display should immediately show a latitude value one degree higher. If the GPS engine mounted
on the Antenna Pedestal is working properly the incorrect value will be overwritten within several
seconds (back to the correct current value).
3 This test does not need to be repeated in the Longitude menu.
6.4. Azimuth & Elevation Drive

This check verifies that the antenna moves in the correct direction in response to the keys. If the antenna is
not driving properly, refer to the Troubleshooting Section of this manual.
1 Press the NEXT key several times to display the Antenna menu.
2 Press the Tracking key to toggle Tracking OFF.
3 Press the UP arrow key repeatedly and verify that the antenna moves up in elevation.
4 Press the DOWN arrow key repeatedly and verify that the antenna moves down in elevation.
5 Press the RIGHT arrow key repeatedly and verify that the antenna moves up in azimuth.
6 Press the LEFT arrow key repeatedly and verify that the antenna moves down in azimuth.
6-1
Functional Testing Series 04 Ku-Band TVRO Antenna
6-2
Series 04 Ku-Band TVRO Antenna Troubleshooting and Maintenance
7. Troubleshooting and Maintenance

If not already ON, Turn ON the Power switch on the front panel of the ACU.
7.1. Theory Of Operation

The antenna system is mounted on a three axis stabilization assembly that provides free motion with 3
degrees of freedom. This assembly allows the inertia of the antenna system to hold the antenna pointed
motionless in inertial space while the ship rolls, pitches and yaws beneath the assembly. Three low friction
torque motors attached to each of the three free axes of the assembly provide the required force to overcome
the disturbing torque imposed on the antenna system by cable restraints, bearing friction and small air
currents within the radome. These motors are also used to re-position the antenna in azimuth and elevation.
The Pedestal Control Unit (PCU) uses inputs from the level cage sensors to calculate the amount of torque
required in each axis to keep the antenna pointed within +/-0.2 degrees. The basic control loops for Cross
Level, Level and Azimuth are shown in the Control Loop Diagram, drawing 116287. The primary sensor input
for each loop is the rate sensor mounted in the Level Cage Assembly. This sensor reports all motion of the
antenna to the PCU. The PCU immediately responds by applying a torque in the opposite direction to the
disturbance to bring the antenna back to its desired position. Both the instantaneous output of the rate
sensor (Velocity Error) and the integrated output of the rate sensor (Position Error) are used to achieve the
high pointing accuracy specification.
The calculated torque commands sent to each of three Brush-Less Servo Amplifiers. These amplifiers
provide the proper drive polarities and commutation required to operate the Brush-Less DC Servo Motors in
torque mode. The Torque acting on the mass of the antenna cause it to move, restoring the rate sensors to
their original position, and closing the control loop.
Since the rate sensors only monitor motion and not absolute position, a second input is required in each axis
as a long term reference to keep the antenna from slowly drifting in position. The Level and Cross Level
reference is provided by a two axis tilt sensor in the level cage assembly. The Azimuth reference is provided
by combining the ships gyro compass input and the antenna relative position.
7.2. Initialization Sequence

A functional operation check can be made on the antenna stabilization system by observing its behavior
during the 4 phases of initialization.
Step 1. Turn on the AC power switch at the ACU front panel. Verify the level platform motor drives the
level cage CCW to the stop and then CW 45 degrees.
Step 2. Verify the antenna moves forward or back to bring the top of the level cage to a level position in
the for/aft direction. This step takes approximately 10 seconds and will result in the dish being at 45
degrees in elevation. The level cage may still be tilted left or right at this time.
Step 3. After the level cage is positioned in the for/aft direction, verify the antenna moves left or right to
bring the top of the level cage to a level position in the left/right direction. This step takes approximately
10 seconds.
Step 4. After the level cage is positioned in the left/right direction, verify the antenna moves CW (up) in
azimuth to the 700.0 degrees, and then down CCW to 630.0 Relative position. From this point on the
Encoder will increment and/or decrement the Relative position of the antenna. The antenna will report the
PCUs’ Model number & Software version to the DAC-2200 ACU.
If any of theses steps fail, or the DAC-2200 reports model number as "xx04", re-configure the PCU as
described in section the Setup section of this manual. If initialization still fails, refer to the troubleshooting
information below or the troubleshooting section of the Touch Screen Controller manual.
7-1
Troubleshooting and Maintenance Series 04 Ku-Band TVRO Antenna
7.3. Replacing or Changing LNBs

Series 04 antenna can be easily fitted with a variety of LNB assemblies. The feed is capable of receiving
linear or circular polarization signals, however, the LNB must match the desired satellite polarization mode.
Below are the instructions to install and align a replacement LNB, or switch to a different LNB. . When a
Linear LNB is installed POL OFFSET parameter must be optimized.
NOTE: Linear polarization skew is intentionally REVERSED from actual received satellite polarization
by the ½ wave length phase card (refer to basic system information). Therefore, to adjust
polarization UP the LNB (as viewed from the back side of the reflector) must rotate CCW and to
adjust polarity DOWN the LNB must rotate CW.
1 Open the radome hatch or remove

radome top.
2 Target a Satellite Longitude that is the
same as the Ships current Longitude.
This will cause Auto-Polarization to rotate
the current LNB to a vertical position
(straight up), and the ACU polarization will
be 120.
3 You may need to rotate the antenna to
access the back of the dish.
4 Note that with the Cross-Level beam level,
the body of the current LNB is vertical
(straight up).
5 If you are replacing the LNB with the same

style LNB, loosen the Allen set screws on
the existing LNB mounting collar (three
set screws, 120 degrees apart) and
extract it from the mounting collar. If you
are changing the LNB to a different style
LNB, loosen the four screws that attach
the mounting collar to the driven gear and
remove the LNB and mounting collar.
6 Insert the new LNB (same style) into the
mounting collar, assure it is seated all the
way into the mounting collar tube, rotate
the LNB as needed to align the center of
the body of the LNB to a vertical position
(straight up) and tighten the set screws.
Mount the (different style) new LNB into
the mounting collar. Assure that the LNB
is seated all the way into the mounting
collar tube, rotated to align the center of
the body of the LNB to a vertical position
(straight up) and tighten the set screws.
7-2
7 Transfer the coax cables from the old LNB

to the new LNB, assure that the correct
color coax is attached to the correct port
on the LNB.
8 Close the radome hatch or re-install the
radome top and tighten radome hardware.
9 Verify that the LNB operating properly and
resume normal operation.
7.4. Balancing the Antenna

The antenna and equipment frame are balanced at the factory however, after disassembly for shipping or
maintenance, balance adjustment may be necessary. Balancing must be done with the power supply turned
off. No belt removal is required to balance the antenna pedestal. Balancing is accomplished by adding or
removing balance trim weights at strategic locations to keep the antenna from falling forward/back or side to
side. The antenna system is not pendulous so 'balanced' is defined as the antenna remaining at rest when
left in any position. The antenna should be balanced within one or two ounces at the typical trim weight
location of 2 feet from the axis of rotation.
The recommend balancing order is Elevation Axis with the antenna pointed at the horizon (referred to as front
to back balance). Elevation Axis with the antenna pointed at zenith (referred to as top to bottom balance).
Then Cross Level axis at any elevation position (referred to as side to side balance). The balance about
azimuth axis is accomplished by accurately positioning the cross level beam in the azimuth stabilization
assembly. This adjustment is done at the factory using special alignment tools. Do NOT attempt to adjust
the cross level beam position in the field without the proper test fixtures.
7.5. Open Loop Sensor Testing

The DAC-2200 provides a means for monitoring the output of the 3 solid state rate sensors and the 3
reference sensors for diagnostic purposes. The rate sensors and reference sensors are the primary inputs to
the PCU for stabilization. Refer to the Setup Flowchart the REMOTE COMMAND window.
To monitor the rate sensors, go to the REMOTE COMMAND window, @0000 will be displayed. Press the
LEFT arrow key 5 times to bring up the cursor and move it to underscore the @ character. Use the UP or
DOWN arrow key to select the lower case “w”, (w0000 should appear in the command window) and hit
ENTER. Press the DOWN or ENTER once more to display the REMOTE MONITOR window. The lower
display will show "w" and three 4 digit decimal numbers (w 1111 2222 3333) . The numbers represent the
Cross Level, Level and Azimuth rate sensor outputs respectively with an nominal display of 2048. The Cross
Level display should decrease when the antenna is tilted to the left and increase when tilted to the right. The
Level display should decrease when the antenna is tilted forward and increase when tilted back. The Azimuth
display should decrease when rotated CCW and increase when rotated CW. The display change occurs
during movement and returns to nominal when movement stops.
7-3
7.6. Reference Sensor Testing

To monitor the reference sensors, go to the REMOTE COMMAND window @0000 will be displayed. Press
the LEFT arrow key 5 times to bring up the cursor and move it to underscore the @ character. Use the UP or
DOWN arrow key to select the lower case “v”, (v0000 should appear in the command window) and hit
ENTER. Press the DOWN or ENTER once more to display the REMOTE MONITOR window. The lower
display will show "v" and three 4 digit decimal numbers (v 1111 2222 3333). The numbers represent the
Cross Level and Level Tilt Sensor outputs and the azimuth encoder respectively.
The Cross Level Tilt display should be 2048 when the level cage is level. It should decrease when the
antenna is tilted to the left and increase when tilted to the right.
The Level tilt display should be 2048 when the level cage is level. It should decrease when the antenna is
tilted forward (EL down) and increase when tilted back (EL up).
The Encoder display will show 2048 in the center of the mechanical range (Relative 360.0), decrease in value
as the antenna is rotated counter-clockwise (down to about 0102 at lower stop) and increase in value as the
antenna is rotated clockwise (up to about 3994 at upper stop) .
7.7. Open Loop Motor Testing

The DAC-2200 provides a means for driving each individual torque motor to test that motors functionality. By
driving each axis and observing the resulting motion of the antenna, a coarse operational status of the motor
and motor driver can be established. Refer to the Setup Flowchart the REMOTE COMMAND window.
To manually drive the motors, go to the REMOTE COMMAND window @0000 will be displayed. Press the
LEFT arrow key 5 times to bring up the cursor and move it to underscore the @ character. Use the UP or
DOWN arrow key to select the lower case “^”, (^0000 should appear in the command window), use the
LEFT/RIGHT arrow keys to select other characters to edit, use the UP/DOWN to increment/decrement each
character and then hit ENTER to command the selected drive. To drive the Cross Level motor, key in ^1064,
^1128 or ^1192 to drive the Cross Level axis left, off and right respectively. To drive the Level motor, key in
^2064, ^2128 or ^2192 to drive the level axis forward, off or back. To drive the Azimuth motor, key in ^3064,
^3128 or ^3192 to drive the azimuth axis CW, off or CCW.
7.8. Antenna Position Error Monitoring

The DAC-2200 provides a means for monitoring the position error of the antenna for diagnostic purposes. If
this error is excessive, it indicates external forces are acting on the antenna. These forces may be the result
of static imbalance, excessive bearing friction, cable binding, or wind loading. Refer to the Setup Flowchart
the REMOTE COMMAND window.
To view the position error, go to the REMOTE COMMAND window @0000 will be displayed. Press the LEFT
arrow key 5 times to bring up the cursor and move it to underscore the @ character. Use the UP or DOWN
arrow key to select the lower case “x”, (x0000 should appear in the command window) and hit ENTER. Press
the DOWN or ENTER once more to display the REMOTE MONITOR window. The lower display will show
"iv" and three 4 digit hex numbers. The numbers indicate Cross Level, Level and Azimuth errors at a
resolution of 1 part in 65536 or 0.0055 degrees. For example a display like "iv FFFF 0001 FFFD" indicates
the Cross Level error is -.005 degrees, the Level error is + .005 degrees and the Azimuth error is -.016
degrees. The normal range of these numbers is FFF0 to 000F and they typically will bounce around
randomly within this range.
7-4
7.9. Pedestal Control Unit Configuration (xx04)

The xx04 PCU is designed to be used with a variety of antenna pedestal configurations so the PCU must be
configured correctly for the model number of the antenna it is mounted on. The configuration information that
is unique to each pedestal type is stored in a Non Volatile Random Access Memory (NVRAM) in the PCU
enclosure. If the PCU is replaced or the NVRAM in the PCU should become corrupt, the PCU must be re-
configured to operate with the pedestal it is installed on. The default configuration for the PCU is model xx04.
In this configuration the Level Cage will be drive normally but the PCU will not drive any of the three torque
motors to prevent damage to the unknown pedestal.
To configure the PCU, find the model configuration number below and go to the REMOTE COMMAND
window where @0000 will be displayed. Press the LEFT arrow key 5 times to bring up the cursor and move it
to underscore the @ character. Use the UP or DOWN arrow key to select the upper case “N”, (N0000 should
appear in the command window), use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow keys to select other characters to edit, use the
UP/DOWN to increment/decrement each character to enter the model configuration number and then hit
ENTER to send this system type command to the PCU.
EXAMPLE: Key in N0006 to configure the PCU for a model 4004 antenna.
Press ENTER several time to select REMOTE PARAMETERS. Press RIGHT arrow and then ENTER to
save the system type in the PCU. Press RESET to display the Remote Version Number. It should now
display the correct model and version number.
7.9.1. Model Configuration Numbers

The following table shows the current mode configuration values for Series 04 pedestals.
MODEL Configuration Number
xx04 N 0000 Turns off all drive motors
3004 N 0005
4004 N 0006
5004 N 0007
6004 N 0008
7-5
7-6
Series 04 Ku-Band TVRO Antenna Specifications
8. Specifications
The specifications of your Series 04 antenna system are below.
8.1. Installed Weight

3004 4004 5004
General Assembly: 100 lbs. (45.4 kg) 101 lbs. (45.8 kg) 115 lbs. (52.2 kg)
Radome Assembly (dry*): 75 lbs. (34.0 kg) 90 lbs. (40.8 kg) 95 lbs. (43.1 kg)
Total Weight (dry): 175 lbs. (79.4 kg) 191 lbs. (86.6 kg) 210 lbs. (95.3 kg)
*NOTE: Radome panels can absorb up to 50% moisture by weight.
8.2. Radome Assembly

Size: 3004 4004 5004
Diameter: 40 inch (101.6 cm) 48 inch (121.9 cm) 61 inch (155 cm)
Height: 48.9 inch (124.2 cm) 58.7 inch (149 cm) 66 inch (167.6 cm)
Type/Material: Rigid fiberglass dome
Radome RF attenuation (dry *): 1.5 dB at 12 GHz
*NOTE: Radome panels can absorb up to 50% moisture by weight. Soaked panels will also have
higher attenuation.
8.3. Stabilized Pedestal Assembly

Stabilization: Three axis: Train, Cross-level, and Level
Positioning: Two Axis (Azimuth, Elevation)
AZ Drive motor: Double stacked size 23 Brushless DC Motor w/Encoder
EL/CL Drive motors: Size 23 Brushless DC Motors
Angular motion range:
Elevation: -15 to +120 degrees
Azimuth: +/- 345 degrees (015 to 705)
Cross-Level: Up to +/- 30 degrees
Stabilization Accuracy 0.2 degree PEAK error under maximum ship's motion condition
Maximum ship motion:
Roll: +/- 25 degrees w/6 sec periods
Pitch: +/- 15 degrees w/6 sec periods
Yaw: +/- 8 degrees w/6 sec periods
Tangential Acceleration: +/- 0.5 g
Surge/Sway/Heave: +/- 0.2 g
Turning rate: 12 deg/sec @ 5 deg/sec/sec
Headway: Up to 30 knots
Elevation Pointing 00.0 (horizon) to 90.0 (zenith)
Relative Azimuth Pointing: 020.0 to 700.0 (Unwrap should occur at 023.0 or 697.0)
8-1
Specifications Series 04 Ku-Band TVRO Antenna
8.4. Pedestal Control Unit (PCU) Assembly

The PCU Assembly contains 3 Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs). One is the main control board, another is the
Motor Driver for the 3 Brushless DC Drive motors (AZ/EL/CL) and the third is a GPS Receiver.
Size 5.2 x 7.3 x 2.1 inches
Connectors
Antenna Pedestal 44 Pin D-Sub connector
Motor Harness 25 Pin D-Sub connector
Interface 15 Pin D-Sub connector
M&C Interface 9600 Baud RS-422
GPS Input BNC connector
8.5. Antenna Reflector/Feed Assembly

3004 4004 5004
Diameter: 30 inch (76.2 cm) 40 inch (101.6 cm) 50 inch (127 cm)
Antenna Gain @ 12 GHz 39 dB typical 41 dB typical 43 dB typical
Minimum EIRP 45 dB 43 dB 41 dB
Type Hydro-formed Aluminum reflector
Feed Cassegrain feed with ring focus splash plate
Polarization Linear or Circular, with ½ wave phase card*
Polarization control Remotely skewed adjustment using 24 volt DC motor, with
potentiometer feedback for Linear and Circular feeds (Auto-
Polarization mode is default).
*NOTE: Linear polarization skew is intentionally REVERSED from actual received satellite
polarization by the ½ wave length phase card (refer to basic system information).
8.6. Interchangeable LNB Options

The Series 04 antenna can be easily fitted with a variety of LNB assemblies. The feed is capable of receiving
linear or circular polarization however the LNB must match the satellite programming type desired. Below are
the LNBs which may be used with this system.
8.6.1. Series 04-1 - US Circular LNB

Sea Tel Part Number: 115075-1
Type: Dual output
LNB Manufacturer: Wistron Neweb, but may vary
RF Frequencies: 12.2 - 12.7 GHz
IF Frequency: 950 - 1450 MHz
LO Frequency: 11.250 GHz
Noise Figure: 1.1 dB max.
Polarization modes: LHCP or RHCP circular
Polarization control: 18VDC (LHCP) or 13VDC (RHCP) voltage switched
8-2
8.6.2. Series 04-2 - KoreaSat Circular LNB

Type: Single output
LNB Manufacturer: HET, but may vary
Polarization modes: LHCP circular
Polarization control: 18 VDC
8.6.3. Series 04-3 - DLA Circular LNB

Type: Dual output
LNB Manufacturer: Eagle Aspen, but may vary
8.6.4. Series 04-4 - Americas Circular LNB

Type: Dual output
LNB Manufacturer: Zinwell, but may vary
Low Band High Band
RF Frequencies: 11.45 - 12.2 GHz 12.2 - 12.75 GHz
IF Frequency: 950 - 1700 MHz 950 - 1450 MHz
LO Frequency: 10.5 GHz 11.25 GHz
Band Selection: 22 kHz continuous tone for High band, no tone for low band.
8.6.5. Series 04-12 - Aussat Linear LNB

Sea Tel Part Number: 117508
Type: Dual output
Polarization modes: Horizontal or Vertical Linear
Polarization control: 18VDC (H) or 13VDC (V) voltage switched
8-3
8.6.6. Series 04-13 - US Linear LNB

Type: Dual output
Polarization modes: Horizontal or Vertical Linear
Polarization control: 18VDC (H) or 13VDC (V) voltage switched
8.6.7. Series 04-14 - European Quad Universal Linear LNB

Type: Quad output
LNB Manufacturer: Brainwave, but may vary
Low Band High Band
RF Frequencies: 10.7 - 11.7 GHz 11.7 - 12.75 GHz
IF Frequencies: 950 - 1950 MHz 1100 - 2150 MHz
LO Frequencies: 9.75 GHz 10.6 GHz
Noise Figure: 0.7 dB typical
Polarization modes: 2 Horiz., 2 Vert. Outputs
Band Selection: 2 Hi, 2 Lo band outputs
8.7. Environmental Conditions

Temperature: -20 degrees C to 55 degrees C.
Humidity: Up to l00% @ 40 degrees C, Non-condensing.
Spray: Resistant to water penetration sprayed from any direction.
Icing: Survives ice loads of 4.5 pounds per square foot. Degraded RF
performance will occur under icing conditions.
Rain: Up to 4 inches per hour. Degraded RF performance will occur
when the radome surface is wet.
Wind: Withstands relative average winds up to 100 MPH from any
direction.
Vibration: Withstand externally imposed vibrations in two horizontal
directions and in the vertical direction, at sweep rates no greater
than 0.2 octaves per minute having peak single amplitudes as
follows:
Frequency Range, Hz Peak Single Amplitude, Inch
4 - 10 0.100
10 - 15 0.030
15 - 25 0.016
25 - 33 0.009
Corrosion Parts are corrosion resistant or are treated to endure effects of
salt air and salt spray. The equipment is specifically designed
and manufactured for marine use.
8-4
8.8. Control and IF Coax Cables

Antenna Control Cable
Coax RG6 or equivalent for runs up to 50 feet, RG11 or equivalent for
runs up to 150. Please consult with Sea Tel for longer coaxial
cable lengths.
Connectors: Snap-On Type F Male, each end
IF Signal Cables
Type: RG6 or equivalent for runs up to 50 feet, RG11 or equivalent for
runs up to 150. Please consult with Sea Tel for longer coaxial
cable lengths.
Connectors: Snap-On Type F Male, each end
8-5
8-6
Series 04 Ku-Band TVRO Antenna Drawings
9. Drawings
This section contains all the drawings that apply to your Sea Tel Model 5004 Antenna. The drawings are
organized into two groups:
9.1. Series 04 TVRO Systems - Part Number Quick Reference
Part Description Part Number

Aux Polang Relay Assembly, Shielded 116281
Azimuth Drive Motor w/Encoder 121951
Pulley, 1/5P, 10T, 2FLG 115467-2
Set Screw, 8-32 x 1/8, SS 114590-188
Belt, Azimuth Drive 116903-11137
Belt, Cross-Level Drive 116903-11137
Belt, Elevation Drive 116903-10437
*A Spare EL Belt is provided on the Cross-Level Beam
Belt, Level Cage Drive 116430-18019
Cross-Level / Elevation Drive Motor 116059-2
Pulley, 1/5P, 10T, 2FLG 115467-2
Set Screw, 6-32 x 1/8, SS 114590-142
GPS Antenna 121966-2
Level Cage Assembly 122937-1
Level Cage Stepper Motor 116059-2
Timing Pulley, .080, 24T 122264
Set Screw, 6-40 x 1/8, SS 122168
LNB, 04-1 - US Circular LNB 115075-1
LNB, 04-2 - KoreaSat Circular LNB 116910-1
LNB, 04-3 - DLA Circular LNB 115075-2
LNB, 04-4 - Americas Circular LNB 118685-2
LNB, 04-12 - Aussat Linear LNB 117508-4
LNB, 04-13 - US Linear LNB 118740
LNB, 04-14 - European Quad Universal Linear LNB 122386
Pedestal Control Unit (PCU) 122203
Pedestal Modem Assy 122363-1
Polarization Motor 121880-1
Gear, Mod, Spur 117139
Set Screw, 10-32 x 3/16, SS 114590-824
Polarization Potentiometer 115425-2
Gear, Mod, Spur 117139
Set Screw, 10-32 x 3/16, SS 114590-824
9-1
Drawings Series 04 Ku-Band TVRO Antenna
9.2. Series 04 Model Specific Drawings
Drawing Title
121987_A System Block Diagram 9-3

122220_A General Assembly, 3004 9-6
121989-1_B Pedestal Assy, 3004 9-12
121989-2_B Pedestal Assy, 4004 9-13
121989-3_B Pedestal Assy, 5004 9-14
122234_B Antenna Assembly, 3004 9-16
122968-1_A Radome Assembly, 40" w/lip 9-22
122663_A Radome Installation Arrangement 9-30
9.3. Series 04 General Drawings
Drawing Title
121986_B Schematic, Antenna RF System xx04 9-31

122373_B Antenna Pedestal Schematic 9-32
121172_F Pedestal Control Unit PCB Schematic 9-33
120851_D1 3 BLDC Motor Driver PCB Schematic 9-34
116280_C Shielded Polang Aux Relay PCB Schematic 9-35
122339-1_B Schematic, FSK Modem 9-36
113480_C RF Cable Assembly 9-37
9-2
SINGLE LEVEL MFG BILL OF MATERIAL
FIND QTY PART NO REV DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESIGNATOR
1 1 EA 121988 A GENERAL ASS'Y, 4004

2 1 EA 122201 B POLANG ASS'Y
3 1 EA 121989-2 B PEDESTAL ASS'Y, 4004
4 1 EA 122203 C PCU ENCLOSURE ASS'Y
5 1 EA 121966-2 A1 GPS ANTENNA, RETERMINATED, 21.0 L
6 1 EA 122208-1 B LEVEL CAGE ASS'Y, 90 DEGREE EL RANG
7 1 EA 122202 A1 POLANG RELAY ASSEMBLY
8 1 EA 122237 A VERTEX FEED, 4004
9 1 EA 115075-1 G LNB MOD, DUAL, US
9 1 EA 115075-2 G LNB MOD, DUAL DLA
10 1 EA 122363-1 B MODEM ASS'Y, 70 KHz, ADE
11 1 EA 116676 A TERMINAL MOUNTING STRIP ASS'Y, ACU
12 1 EA 122342 F DAC-2200, RACKMOUNT ASS'Y
13 2 EA 119061 C TONE GENERATOR ASS'Y, RACK
14 1 EA 119732 MULTI-SWITCH, 4/8/12 OUTPUT, (REF. USE SEE DASH #
15 1 EA 122073-X (REFSEE DASH # )TSC-10 LCD KIT,
16 1 EA 121485-2 C HARNESS ASS'Y, REFLECTOR
17 1 EA 122223-1 C1 HARNESS ASS'Y, PEDESTAL, REFERENCE
18 1 EA 122224 A HARNESS ASS'Y, INTERFACE, DBS04
19 1 EA 122225 D HARNESS ASS'Y, PEDESTAL, 3BLDC, DBS
20 1 EA 122370 C HARNESS ASS'Y, BASE SPINDLE, DBS04
21 4 EA 122372 CABLE ASS'Y, RG179, COLOR CODED, (RE SEE DASH #.
22 5 EA 113480 CABLE ASS'Y, RF, RG6/RG11/CDF40, (REF. SEE CABLE KIT 122598 & DASH
NO. FOR LENGTHS
23 2 EA 111115-3 CABLE ASS'Y, F(M)-F(M), 3 FT.

24 2 EA 111115-6 B CABLE ASS'Y, F(M)-F(M), 6 FT.
25 1 EA 122505-15 CABLE ASS'Y, DE-9, 15 FEET
26 1 EA 112587-3 A1 CABLE ASS'Y, BNC-RCA, 15 FEET SEE DASH #.
27 4 EA 114178 O ADAPTER, F(F)-F(F) (BULLET), 1.0 IN L
SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM, 4004
PROD FAMILY EFF. DATE DRAWING NUMBER REV

SHT 1 OF 2
LIT 10-Sep-04 121987 A
28 4 EA 115492-1 C ADAPTER, N(F)-SMA(F), W/FLANGE

29 1 EA 122027 A PANEL, CONNECTOR, LOWER
30 1 EA 120808 A BRACKET, CONNECTOR
31 1 EA 122353-2 A RADOME ASS'Y, 48 IN, W/ LIP, FOAM
SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM, 4004

SHT 2 OF 2
LIT 10-Sep-04 121987 A

2 1 EA 122234 B ANTENNA ASS'Y, 3004
3 1 EA 122911 A WEIGHT CONFIGURATION, 3004
4 8 EA 114593-162 SCREW, SOCKET HD, 10-32 x 3/8, S.S.
5 8 EA 114580-011 WASHER, FLAT, #10, S.S.
6 1 EA 121655-2 C LABELS INSTALLATION, XX04
GENERAL ASS'Y, 3004

SHT 1 OF 1
SERIES 04 09-Sep-04 122220 A
REV. ECO# DATE DESCRIPTION BY
A 4499 7-14-04 RELEASED TO PRODUCTION, REV WAS X2. ADD'D HARDWARE, BALANCE WEIGHTS, AND LABELS INSTALLATION. ADD'D NOTES 2 AND 3. V.S.
NOTES: (UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)
1. APPLY ADHESIVE PER SEATEL SPEC 121730.
2 FOR PROPER SPOOLING OF INTERFACE HARNESS, INSTALL SERVICE

LOOP, ATTACH CONECTORS AND SET PEDESTAL TO CENTER OF
AZIMUTH RANGE. THEN LOOSEN P-CLIP, REMOVE ALL TWISTING FROM
HARNESS AND RETIGHTEN P-CLIP.
3 BALANCE WEIGHTS SHOWN TYPICAL. ADJUST TRIMWEIGHTS AND

HARDWARE AS NECESSARY.
6
3 3
LOOP CABLE
2
TIE 4 1
CABLE SERVICE
2 LOOP AS SHOWN
3 3
4 5 8X
TOLERANCES
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
SCALE: APPROVED BY: DRAWN BY:

X.X = +
- .050" 1:10 P. McCANN
DATE: DRAWING SIZE:
2 X.XX + .020"
= - 10-8-03 B
TITLE:
X.XXX = +
- .005"
ANGLES = +
GENERAL ASSEMBLY, 3004
- 30'
MODEL: SHEET: DRAWING NUMBER REVISION
3rd ANGLE
PROJECTION
3004 1 OF 1 122220 A
DOCUMENT NO. 117084 REV. C DRAWING CREATED IN SOLIDWORKS

5 8 EA 114580-011 WASHER, FLAT, #10, S.S.
GENERAL ASS'Y, 4004

SHT 1 OF 1
SERIES 04 09-Sep-04 121988 A
NOTES: (UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED) X2 N/A 11-20-03 UPDATED DRAWING DETAILS PER SUB ASSY CHANGES, BOM UPDATED P.M.
1. APPLY ADHESIVE PER SEATEL SPEC 121730. A 4499 12-9-03 RELEASED TO PRODUCTION. ADDED HARDWARE AND BALANCE WEIGHTS. ADD'D NOTES 2 AND 3. CHANGED REV. FROM X2 TO A. V.S.


2
CABLE SERVICE 6
2 LOOP AS SHOWN
LOOP CABLE
TIE 4±1 2
3 3
8X 4 5
2
TOLERANCES

X.X = +
- .050" 1:10 P. McCANN
DATE: DRAWING SIZE:
X.XX + .020"
= - 10-8-03 B
TITLE:
X.XXX = +
- .005"
ANGLES = +
- 30'
3rd ANGLE
PROJECTION
4004 1 OF 1 121988 A

5 8 EA 114580-011 WASHER, FLAT, #10, S.S.
GENERAL ASS'Y, 5004

SHT 1 OF 1
SERIES 04 09-Sep-04 122221 A
4499 7-14-04 RELEASED TO PRODUCTION, REV WAS X2. ADD'D HARDWARE, BALANCE WEIGHTS, AND LABELS INSTALLATION. ADD'D NOTES 2 AND 3. V.S.
NOTES: (UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED) A


2
3 3
LOOP CABLE
CABLE SERVICE TIE 4 1 2
2 LOOP AS SHOWN
3 3
TOLERANCES
4 5 8X
X.X = +
- .050" 1:10 P. McCANN
DATE: DRAWING SIZE:
X.XX + .020"
= - 10-8-03 B
TITLE:
X.XXX = +
- .005"
ANGLES = +
- 30'
2 3rd ANGLE
PROJECTION
5004 1 OF 1 122221 A
1 1 EA 121991-1 C BASE SPINDLE ASS'Y, XX04

2 1 EA 123452 X1 CROSS LEVEL, MOTOR ASS'Y, XX04
4 1 EA 121995-1 C TUBE, AZ POST, 3004
5 1 EA 122026 A PANEL, 9 PIN D-SUB
7 1 EA 122204 C EL PAN ASS'Y
8 1 EA 121992 F LEVEL BEAM ASS'Y
10 8 EA 122948 X1 RIVET, S.S. BUTTONHEAD
11 0.6 OZ 122439-6 ADHESIVE, LOCTITE H3151 (NOT SHOWN)
50 6 EA 110941-3 B SCREW, JACK, 4-40 X 5/16, S.S.

51 6 EA 119952-005 WASHER, STAR, INTERNAL TOOTH, #4, S.
52 6 EA 119961-005 NUT, HEX, SMALL PATTERN, 4-40, S.S.
53 10 EA 114588-148 SCREW, PAN HD, PHIL, 6-32 x 1/2, S.S.
PEDESTAL ASS'Y, 3004

SHT 1 OF 1
COMMON 09-Sep-04 121989-1 B

4 1 EA 121995-2 C TUBE, AZ POST, 4004
11 0.6 OZ 122439-6 ADHESIVE, LOCTITE H3151

SHT 1 OF 1
COMMON 09-Sep-04 121989-2 B

4 1 EA 121995-3 C TUBE, AZ POST, 5004
11 0.6 OZ 122439-6 ADHESIVE, LOCTITE H3151

SHT 1 OF 1
COMMON 09-Sep-04 121989-3 B
X4 N/A 11-20-03 RECREATED DRAWING, REMOVED ITEMS 6, 19, 20 & 22 P.M.
A N/A 04-02-04 RELEASED TO PRODUCTION. ADD'D NOTE 2. ITEM 10 WS ITEM 54. V.S.
B 4557 08-24-04 ITEM 2 WS 121993. V.S.
2 4
ALL AROUND 2
P/O ITEM 8
10 8X 2
P/O ITEM 8 3
5 9 4X
50 51 52 4X REFERENCE DRAWING
2X 52 51 50 123452 (CROSS LEVEL ASSY)
FOR ASS'Y DETAILS
53 6X
4X 53
P/O ITEM 8

ALL AROUND 2 1 APPLY ADHESIVE PER SEATEL SPEC 121730.
2 APPLY EPOXY, ITEM 11, PER VENDOR'S RECOMENDATIONS

THEN POP RIVET AND ALLOW TO CURE.
TOLERANCES

X.X = +
- .050" 1:6 P. McCANN
1 DATE: DRAWING SIZE:
X.XX + .020"
= - 10-6-03 B
TITLE:
DESH # DESCRIPTION X.XXX = +
- .005"
-1 P E DESTAL ASSEMBLY 3004
ANGLES = +
PEDESTAL ASSEMBLY, DBS 04
-2 P E DESTAL ASSEMBLY 4004 - 30'
-3 P E DESTAL ASSEMBLY 5004 3rd ANGLE
PROJECTION
XX04 1 OF 2 121989 B
1 1 EA 122180 B REFLECTOR MACHINING, 30 IN. RX ONLY

3 2 EA 122181-1 B CLIP, 30 IN. REFLECTOR, RX ONLY
4 2 EA 122181-2 B CLIP, 30 IN. REFLECTOR, RX ONLY
5 1 EA 122358 X1 VERTEX FEED, 24 IN
6 1 EA 122359 X1 FEED ADAPTER, 24 IN TO 30 IN
51 16 EA 122076-333 WASHER, FLAT, #10, 18-8 SS, (.5 OD x 7/32
52 16 EA 109270 O WASHER, ISO DAMP
53 8 EA 114583-011 A NUT, HEX, 10-32, S.S.
55 4 EA 114592-409 STUD, FULLY THREADED, 4-40 X 1/2, S.S.
56 4 EA 114583-005 NUT, HEX, 4-40, S.S.
57 4 EA 114580-005 WASHER, FLAT, #4, S.S.
58 4 EA 114581-005 WASHER, LOCK, #4, S.S.
ANTENNA ASS'Y, 3004

SHT 1 OF 1
COMMON 09-Sep-04 122234 B
A N/A 3-1-04 RELEASED TO PRODUCTION, ADDED HARDWARE, CHANGED VIEWS, REV WAS X1 P.M.
B 4551 08-18-04 ITEM 51:122076-333 WS 114580-012 SCC
2 APPLY LOCTITE RED PER SEATEL SPEC 121730 &

ALLOW TO CURE PRIOR TO INSTALLING ITEM 6. 8X 52 51 50 1
4X 57 REF 1
4X STUD SHALL NOT PROTRUDE
BEYOND THIS SURFACE
4X 56
4X 55
6
2
REF 6
A
2 REF A
SECTION A-A
SCALE 2 : 1
4 2X
54 58 4X
2X 3
53 8X
51 8X
52 8X
TOLERANCES

X.X = +
- .050" 1:6 P. McCANN
DATE: DRAWING SIZE:
X.XX = +
- .020" 3-1-04 B
2 X.XXX = +
TITLE:
- .005"
ANGLES = +
ANTENNA ASSEMBLY, 3004
- 30'
3rd ANGLE
PROJECTION
3004 1 OF 1 122234 B
1 1 EA 122092 A REFLECTOR MACHINING, 40 IN

2 1 EA 122237 A VERTEX FEED, 4004
4 2 EA 122034-1 A CLIP, 40 IN. REFLECTOR
6 1 EA 122365 A EPOXY PLATE
53 8 EA 114583-011 A NUT, HEX, 10-32, S.S.
55 4 EA 114592-868 STUD, FULLY THREADED, 4-40 x 1 IN, S.S.
56 4 EA 114583-005 NUT, HEX, 4-40, S.S.
57 4 EA 114580-005 WASHER, FLAT, #4, S.S.
59 4 EA 114580-008 WASHER, FLAT, #6, SMALL PATTERN, S.S.
ANTENNA ASS'Y, 4004

SHT 1 OF 1
X2 N/A 12-4-03 CONVERTED DRAWING FROM ORTHO TO ISO, ADDED HARDWARE, ADDED ITEM 6 P.M.
NOTES: (UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED) 3-4-04 RELEASED TO PRODUCTION, CHANGED DRAWING VIEWS, REARRANGED HARDWARE ITEM NUMBERS: 55 WAS 50 & -867, DELETED 51, 58 WAS 52, 59 WAS 53, 50 WAS 54, 51 WAS 55, 52 WAS 56, 53 WAS 57,
A N/A P.M.
ADDED 56 & 57
2 APPLY EPOXY PER ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS.
50 51 52 8X
ALLOW TO CURE PRIOR TO INSTALLING ITEM 2.
REF 55
3 A
A
6 2
SCALE: 1:4
1 REF
4X 58
4X STUD SHALL
4X 59 5 2X NOT PROTRUDE
BEYOND THIS
SURFACE OF
ITEM 3
4X 55
3
REF 2
4X 56
3 REF
52 8X SECTION A-A
4X 57 SCALE 1 : 1
TOLERANCES
4 2X
X.X = +
- .050" 1:8 P. McCANN
51 53 8X DATE: DRAWING SIZE:
X.XX + .020"
= - 12-4-03 B
SCALE: 1:4 TITLE:
X.XXX = +
- .005"
ANGLES = +
- 30'
3rd ANGLE
PROJECTION 4004 1 OF 1 121990 A
1 1 EA 122169 A REFLECTOR MACHINING, 50 IN

5 1 EA 122358 X1 VERTEX FEED, 24 IN
6 1 EA 122362 X1 FEED ADAPTER, 24 IN TO 50 IN
7 1 EA 122365 A EPOXY PLATE
53 8 EA 114583-011 A NUT, HEX, 10-32, S.S.
55 4 EA 114592-409 STUD, FULLY THREADED, 4-40 X 1/2, S.S.
56 4 EA 114583-005 NUT, HEX, 4-40, S.S.
57 4 EA 114580-005 WASHER, FLAT, #4, S.S.
58 4 EA 114581-005 WASHER, LOCK, #4, S.S.
60 4 EA 114580-008 WASHER, FLAT, #6, SMALL PATTERN, S.S.
ANTENNA ASS'Y, 5004

SHT 1 OF 1
A N/A 3-3-04 RELEASED TO PRODUCTION, ADDED HARDWARE, ADDED EPOXY PLATE, CHANGED VIEWS, REV WAS X1 P.M.
B 4551 08-18-04 ITEM 51: 122076-333 WS 114580-012 SCC
1
ALLOW TO CURE PRIOR TO INSTALLING ITEM 6.
3 APPLY EPOXY PER ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS. 6
7 3
2 54 58 4X
4X 60 59
A
SCALE: 1:6
5
4X 57
4X 56
1 REF
50 51 52 8X
4X STUD SHALL NOT PROTRUDE
BEYOND THIS SURFACE OF ITEM 2
4X 55
52 8X 2 TOLERANCES
REF 6 UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
4 4X SCALE: APPROVED BY: DRAWN BY:

X.X = +
- .050" 1:8 P. McCANN
DATE: DRAWING SIZE:
X.XX = +
- .020" 3-3-04 B
51 8X
TITLE:
X.XXX = +
- .005"
53 8X 3 4X ANGLES = +
SECTION A-A 2 - 30'
SCALE 2 : 1 REF 3rd ANGLE
PROJECTION
5004 1 OF 1 122235 B
1 1 EA 122348-2 X1 RADOME TOP, 40 IN, W/ LIP, FOAM, WHITE

2 1 EA 122349 X2 RADOME BASE, 40 IN, W/ LIP, WHITE
3 3 EA 109258-8 F STRAIN RELIEF, W/SEALING LOCK NUT
4 1 EA 118569 A MOUNTING KIT, RADOME
5 10 EA 119801-012 B CABLE TIE, NYLON, 4 INCH
6 1 EA 111679-7 0 NYLON CABLE CLAMP, 1/2 DIA
8 0.1 OZ 116702 ADHESIVE/SEALANT, E6000
9 4 EA 122465 A BRACKET, SHIPPING
10 2 EA 110481-4 DECAL, LOGO, 5 1/4 X 16 IN
12 132 IN 122850-38 A FOAM, VINYL, 1 IN WIDE X 1/4 IN THICK
13 4 EA 122200 B LIFTING TAB
51 12 EA 114580-007 WASHER, FLAT, #6, S.S.
52 6 EA 114583-007 NUT, HEX, 6-32, S.S.
54 2 EA 114580-009 WASHER, FLAT, #8, S.S.
55 1 EA 114583-009 NUT, HEX, 8-32, S.S.
56 8 EA 114586-537 SCREW, HEX HD, 1/4-20 x 3/4, S.S.
57 24 EA 114580-029 WASHER, FLAT, 1/4, S.S.
58 12 EA 120731-360 A NUT, ACORN - 1/4-20 x 5/16 DP., S.S
RADOME ASS'Y, 40 INCH, GA INSTALL, WHITE/FOAM

SHT 1 OF 1
COMMON 09-Sep-04 122968-1 A
SCC
V.S.
SCC
RADOME ASSEMBLY, 40 INCH, GA INSTALL
122968 A
SCC
122968 A
1 1 EA 122351-2 A RADOME TOP, 48 IN, W/ LIP, FOAM, WHITE

2 1 EA 122784 B RADOME BASE FAB ASS'Y, 48 IN, W/ LIP,
10 2 EA 110481-3 DECAL, LOGO, 8 X 24 IN
11 1 EA 109783-2 WRENCH, L
51 12 EA 114580-007 WASHER, FLAT, #6, S.S.
52 6 EA 114583-007 NUT, HEX, 6-32, S.S.
54 2 EA 114580-009 WASHER, FLAT, #8, S.S.
55 1 EA 114583-009 NUT, HEX, 8-32, S.S.
57 24 EA 114580-029 WASHER, FLAT, 1/4, S.S.
RADOME ASS'Y, 48 INCH, GA INSTALL, WHITE/FOAM

SHT 1 OF 1
COMMON 09-Sep-04 122970-1 A
SCC
V.S.
SCC
122970 A
SCC
122970 A
1 1 EA 122874-2 X2 RADOME TOP, 60 IN W/ LIP, ZERO DRAFT,

2 1 EA 123126 X1 RADOME BASE FAB ASS'Y, 60 IN, W/ LIP,
10 2 EA 110481-3 DECAL, LOGO, 8 X 24 IN
11 1 EA 109783-2 WRENCH, L
51 12 EA 114580-007 WASHER, FLAT, #6, S.S.
52 6 EA 114583-007 NUT, HEX, 6-32, S.S.
54 2 EA 114580-009 WASHER, FLAT, #8, S.S.
55 1 EA 114583-009 NUT, HEX, 8-32, S.S.
57 32 EA 114580-029 WASHER, FLAT, 1/4, S.S.
RADOME ASS'Y, 60 IN, GA INSTALL, WHITE/FOAM, XX04

SHT 1 OF 1
COMMON 09-Sep-04 122969-1 A
SCC
V.S.
SCC
122969 A
SCC
122969 A
REV ECO # DATE DESCRIPTION BY
NOTES: C1 N/R 4-14-04 908304MHz WS 4.0MHZ MSF

V CC V CC V CC V CC
1) DIODE ARRAY D1A IS A STUFFING OPTION FOR D12-D19. D 4415 05-07-04 CHANGED R8 AND R30 FROM 300 OHM TO 470 OHM LK
CC
2 D1A
SEE BOM FOR USE. E 4452 6-4-04 ADD D20, ALSO ADD 2702 PCB ASSY TO REF DWG. MODEL WAS 4003/2702 LK
AZ REF 1
L D S-C32R 2) A/D CONVERTER U2 IS A STUFFING OPTION FOR U4. SEE
3
1
HOME SENSOR A B C D E F G DP BOM FOR USE. F 4465 6-4-04 R28 WAS 300 OHM.
1 16
LK
J8 INTERFACE R1A J1-18
1
ID C 3 V CC 4.7K
1
D18 D19
D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 1N 4148 1N 4148 2 D2
1N4148 1N 4148 1N4148 1N 4148 1N4148 1N 4148 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 U2 1N 4749A
LTC1290 RAMSEL 1 8 R2 Q1
3
R3A CE VCC 2.0K ZTX690B
C L RATE SK
16 1K 1 CL RATE 1 18 2 7
J1-13 LV RATE R3B CH0 SCLK SK STO
15 1K 2 LV RATE 2 17 SDO 3 6
J1-12 AZ RATE R 3C CH1 DIN DI RCL
2 15
14 1K 3 AZ RATE 3 16 SDI 4 5
J1-11 CH2 DOUT DO VSS R1B J1-3
1
CL 4 15 4.7K
CH3 CS- U1 D3
2
LV 5 19 X2444 1N 4749A
R 3D CH4 ACLK R4 Q2
AZ REF
3
13 1K 4 AZ REF 6 V CC 2.0K ZTX690B
J1-26 POL POT R3E
12 1K 5 POL POT 7
CH5
20
NV RAM R1C
J1-10 AGC R 3F CH6 VCC 4.7K
11 1K 6 AGC 8 14 3 14
J1-25 CH7 REF+
9 13 J1-19
1
COM REF-
12 2 D4
+ C1 + C2 + C3 V- 1N 4749A
1 1 1 11 10 VCC V CC R5 Q3
3
AGND DGND
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
2.0K ZTX690B
C N1 C N2
27pF C C C C C C C C 27pF RATE SENSOR INTERFACE R1D
4.7K
16
U4 4 13
T LV2553IDW V CC IOSEL 1 4
VDD
J1-4
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
SDO STR Q1
2 5
D Q2
1
1 20 SDI 3 6
AIN0 VCC CLK Q3 D5
15 7 2
OE Q4 1N 4749A
2 19 14
AIN1 EOC Q5 R6 Q4
13
3
R7 Q6 2.0K ZTX690B
3 18 12
360K AIN2 I/O CLK Q7
11
Q8
4 17
AIN3 DATA IN
9 LC MOTOR DRIVER
VSS
C4 QS
5 16 10
VAA R9 0.1 AIN4 DATA OUT QS
10.0K 1% 6 15 U3 AUX
8
AIN5 CS- 4094 12 5
7 14 J2-9
C5 R10 AIN6 REF+ R 1E
C6 R11 0.1 200K 8 13 4.7K
AIN7 REF- M1
4
0.1 240K R12 11 6

CTR 2 - 10.0K 1% V CC 9 12 J2-1
J1-14 AIN8 AIN10 R1F
10
1 6 -
3 + 7 10
GND AIN9
11 4.7K M2
V CC U5A 5 + R 25G 10 7
MC34074 U5B 1K J2-10
11
C8 MC34074 C7 R 1G R 25H
0.1 0.1 9 - 4.7K 1K
SPARE
7
R 14
16
8 8 9
1.00K 1% R13 10 + J1-8
12 100K U 5C
VBB
X0 MC34074
13 14
X1 X V CC
R 15 2 VBIAS 2 1
1.00K 1%
VBIAS 1
Y0
Y1 Y
15 A/D R8 D6 R16
5 470 GRN 680
Z0 C9
F1 3 4 11 10 2 1
Z1 Z 0.1
2
6 U7E R30 D 11
CL+ INH JP1 4069 470 RED
+
2 1 4 3 11
J1-29 10
A
GND
C10 U7A U7B 9
B R17 J U MPER PTA0
1
10 4069 4069 C 200K 4
U8
U6 MC34064
VCC
CL-
8
4053 2
+
J1-44 3 2
IRQ-
RST
C11 GND IN 3
10 C12
F2 1
0.1 V2
PROGRAMMING
1
R19 J7
LV+ 10K IDC4
+
6 5 8 9 13 -
J1-15
INTERFACE
+
14
DALBA CK
C13 U 7C U 7D R18 12 + C14
1
10 4069 4069 100K U 5D 1 V CC
MC34074 D20
LV- FOR 121171 1N4001
+
J1-30 VBIAS FOR 121533 ASSEMBLIES
16
41
31
30
40
17
1
C15 DELETE U10 ONLY
TILT SENSOR DEMODULATOR
2
10 C 16 JUMPER U10-2 TO U10-7
VDDA
VSS
VSSA
RST-
VDD
VSSAD
VDDAD
0.1 JUMPER U10-3 TO U10-5 VAA
VAA J2-8
TP1
32
PTA0 PTD0/ SS-
12
1 VAA J2-15
1
A1 33 13 MISO 8
RX+
J2-7
VCC
PTA1 PTD1/ MISO Rx+
W R- 34 14 MOSI 2 7
RX-
V CC PTA2 PTD2/ MOSI Rx Rx- R20
TX+
J2-5
R S EL 35 15 SK 6 300
PTA3 PTD3/ SPSCK
3
Tx+ J2-13
GND
SP ARE 36 18
Tx
5
TX-
PTA4 PTD4/ T1CH0 F1 Tx- J2-6
9
1
AZA 37 19 U 10 (U22) J2-12
GND
4
PTA5 PTD5/ T1CH1 F2
R 21H D S8921 D7 D8 D9
4.7K AZB GPS0 1N4148 1N 4148 1N 4148
R 21A
38
PTA6 PTD6/ T2CH0
20
GND J2-14
4.7K A0 39 21 GPS1
AZA
8
2
PTA7 PTD7/ T2CH1
1 16 1
J1-9
15
3 RX+
AZB U9 Rx
14
2 10
J1-24 R23 U22 RxD/ PTE1
RX-
1
R21C R22 U 11A 5 1K R 21B 68HC908GP32_44 9 Tx
VAA
4.7K 100K C17
470pF
14077
6
4 4.7K TxD/ PTE0
V2
RS 422 TX+
4
2
R 21E D0/S DO RAMSEL 3
22 2 4 13 TX-
3
4.7K U 11B PTB0 PTC0

1 14077 D1/ SK IOSEL R21D 2
5 12 8 23 3
AGC PTB1 PTC1 V2 4.7K V CC R 26 J3
10
2 R 25A D 2/SDI ADSEL 4.7K IDC4
9 24 4 6 11
SEL 1K R S EL PTB2 PTC2 R 21F
1 16 1 16 1 JP2 2 CONSCAN
3 R 25B R24 U11C D3 CONSCAN 4.7K
25 5 2 15
SDO 2 1K 15 D0/S DO 100K C18 14077 PTB3 PTC3
3 14 1 JP3 2 PWM
J2-2
4 R 25C 470pF D4 PWM
SK 26 6 4 13
3 1K 14 D1/ SK PTB4 PTC4
5 12 1 JP4 2 MON1
J2-3
5 R 25D D5 MON1
27 7 6 11
SDI 4 1K 13 D 2/SDI PTB5 PTC5
7 10 1 JP5 2 MON2
J2-11
6 R 25E D6 MON2
28 8 8 9
J2-4
CGMXFC
SPARE 1K SP ARE PTB6 PTC6
10
5 12
7
IRQ LOGIC
OSC2
OSC1
D7 29
IRQ-
PTB7 R 21G
8 4.7K 1 2
J4 JP6 J1-10
PERIPHERAL I/O
43
44
42
11
ID C 8
7
J1-23
SPARE
RECEIVER INTERFACE VCC VAA 8
15
VAA
J2-7 7
1 14
VAA R27 GND
J2-6 6
1M 2 13
J2-13
GPS0 J2-5 5
D3 3 12
1 D4 GND
2 GPS1 J2-4 4
D 2/SDI 4 11
3 D5 J2-11
4 J2-3 3
D1/ SK 5 10
5 D6 Y1 J2-10
6 D0/S DO TP2 9.8304MHz GPS INTERFACE J5 J2-2 2
9
1
7 ID C 5 J2-9
8 VAA J2-1 1
W R- C19 C 20
9 A1 15pF 15pF J2
10
11
12
A0
D7
MOTOR DRIVER VAA
+28V
DB-15P
DAL BACK U12

13
14
INTERFACE VBB 3
OUT
LM7812C/TO220
IN
1
15 +12V
GND
J6
I DC15
1
TP3 U13
2
VAA V C C VBB VAA LM7805C/TO220

V CC 3 1
1 44 J1-44 OUT IN
1 44 +5V
2 43
2 43
GND
J1-3 3 42
3 42 R28 + C21 + C22 + C23
J1-4 4 41
4 41
1
5 40 470 100 470 1

5 40 TP4
2
6 39 V CC
6 39
7 38
7 38
J1-8 8 37
8 37 V CC
9 36
2
J1-9 9 36
10 35 C 25
J1-10 10 35
11 34 D10 0.1
J1-11 11 34
12 33 G RN
J1-12 12 33
13 32 C24
J1-13 13 32
14 31 0.1 12
J1-14 14 31
1
J1-15 15 30 J1-30 11
15 30
16 29 J1-29 12 13 13
16 29
17 28
17 28 U 7F U 11D
18 27
J1-18
J1-19 19
18 27
26 J1-26 VSS 4069 14077 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS:
19 26
20
21
22
20
21
25
24
25
24
23
J1-25
J1-24
POWER SUPPLY V DD V CC
121170
121171
PCB FAB, PCU, 3 AXIS
PCB ASSY, PCU, 3 AXIS
22 23 J1-23
SC ALE: APPROVED BY: D RAWN BY: NICO
J1 121533 PCB ASSY, PCU, 2702
D B-44S
DATE: 03/11/03 D W G S IZE: Custom
TITLE:
PCB SCHEMATICS. 3-AXIS PCU

MODEL: SHEET D R A W I N G NUMBER R EV
XX03/04/2702 1 OF 1 121172 F
REV ECO # DATE DESCRIPTION BY
B 4005
4305 03-03-04 ADD R17-19, D2-D3, DEL R5, SWAP L1 AND L2 PB
C 4369 04-06-04 ADD D4. REV B PCB FAB. PB
V CC V CC D 4510 7-8-04 R1 WS 150; C15 WS 330pF MSF
E 4522 7-13-04 R8 WS 200K MSF
E1 NA 8-04-04 UPDATE FREQUENCY DIVIDER NOTES AND JUPMER SETTINGS PGB

C1 C2
.1uF .1uF
U1A U1B C17 R1 L1
16
.1uF 300 68uH
14
2 6 14 10
VCC
J Q J Q
3 K Q 7 13 K Q 9
U2A U2B
1 2 3 4 4 12 VBB
CLK CLK C3 C4
74AC04 R2 74AC04 1 15 .068uF .068uF
GND
1K CLR CLR
5 11
7
PRE PRE
R3
8
1M 74AC109 74AC109 L3
70uH D4
Torroid 1N4001
U3
V CC R14
1 3 10
OSC1 OSC2
GND
4 MHz /2 /2
2
EFO-MC4004A4 C5
.1uF
C6 U4 C7 C8 C9 J2
1
390pF .1uF .018uF .018uF F Connector
13 2 1
VCC
T-CAP INPUT
C10 14 6 D1 R6
2
.1uF T-CAP Q-DET - LED 1K V CC R4 L2
10 5 1K 150 uH D2
VREF Q-DET +
1N4001
R7 9 JP1
18K 9
1 2
12 C11
T-R .068uF
Q-DET FILT 3
11 R12
LOOP DET
3
5.1K V CC R9 C12
GND
R8 8 7 470K 470pF
V CC R10 FSK IN DATA OUT
100K
JP5 2 5K R11
4
BDE(-2) ADE (-1) 100K XR2211
C13
V CC 120pF
1
1 3 C14
.1uF
2
U5
16
1 3
R16
2
10K 2 14
VCC
CLK Q1
13 Tx 4
R15 Q2
1 3 3 P1 Q3 12
10K U 2C 4 11
2
P2 Q4
5 6 5
8 RX - 6
P3
15 R13
74AC04 P4 TC 510K
1 CLR
9
7 RX + 7
LD
PE C15
10 TE 120pF
GND
U 2F
13 12 R19
8
74AC161 U2E 330
74AC04 11 10
TX + 5
74AC04
U 2D R17
8 9 1K
74AC04 TX- 6
/N R18
1K
VBB
J1 U6
1 LM7805
2
3
ADE (-1 PCU) Frequency settings VO VI VBB 2
GND
4 RX- U2-6 P4321 Div N KHz
5
6 L H 0010 14 71.428 GND 1
7
8 H L 0000 16 66.666
U7 C16
LM7805 NOT LOADED .1uF
CON8
BDE (-2 ACU) Frequency settings V CC VO VI
GND
RX- U2-6 P4321 Div N KHz
L H 1000 8 125.000
H L 0111 9 111.111 D3
1N4001
REFERENCES:
122340 TEST PROCEDURE
122338 PCB ASS'Y MODEM DAC 2000
122337 PCB FAB MODEM DAC 2000
SCALE: APPROVED BY: DRAWN BY: PGB

DATE: 5/29/03 D W G SIZE: C
TITLE:
SCHEMATIC, FSK MODEM, ADE 70 KHz -1
MODEL: SHEET DRAW ING NUMBER REV
XX04 1 OF 1 122339-1 E1
TV – FM – AM ANTENNA
NAVAL MODEL
MARK 32ALC
TV-FM-AM antenna Mark 32ALC
Mark 32ALC is an omni-directional wide band antenna
(0.1-26.5 and 40-860 MHz) TV-FM-AM, for maritime
purposes. It is based on a construction of loop
antennas coupled to three band amplifiers
each with an individual automatic level
control unit - ALC.
The ALC’s have very high dynamic
range, and keeps the antenna free
from intermodulation even in the
vicinity of high power transmitters.
Mark 32ALC is made of ABS
plastic and filled with polyurethane
foam. Mounting base in saltwater proof
special alloy and bolts in stainless acid
proof steel. Mark 32ALC is tested by “Det
Norske Veritas” for the same approval as for radar
equipment.
The advantages of Mark 32ALC compared to a Yagi

antenna system are:
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
• ALC Automatic level control.
Frequency range: 0.1-26.5 MHz,
40-110 MHz, ALC > 60 dB
• Rigid, non-corrodible, 170-230 MHz, ALC > 50 dB
maintenance free construction 470-890 MHz, ALC > 35 dB(470-700 MHz)
ALC > 25 dB(700-890 MHz)
Gain: >12 dB@0.1-26.5 MHz
• Small dimensions and easy to >25 dB@40-110, 170-230 MHz
mount. >25 dB@470-890 MHz
Return loss: >16 dB@40 MHz -1.5 dB/octave
Noise factor: 4.5 dB
• Omni-directional, no adjustments. ALC limited output level: 95 dBµV
(CTB < -60 dB)
• Replaceable amplifier.
Output impedance:
Supply voltage:
75 ohm
15 V DC
Current consumption: approx. 200 mA
EMC: EN 50082-1, 55024-2, 55024-4
Operation temp. range: -40 - +70°C
Wavetraps: 156 MHz VHF (radiotelephone)
Weight: 3 kg
0210
Material: ABS plastic white (grey on special order)
Since 1971, the objective of Naval Electronics has been to offer the
best possible products for TV and Radio reception at sea. Naval
began with omnidirectional antennas and is the world leader in this
field of technology today. Now, with an expanded product range, the
name Naval means much more than antennas. Naval operates in
more than 40 countries and has installations on thousands of Naval Electronics AB
vessels all over the world. Höjdrodergatan 18, SE-212 39 Malmö, Sweden
Tel. +46(0)40-29 20 45. Fax +46(0)40-18 74 13
All specifications stated are subject to change without notice. E-mail:sales@naval.se www.naval.se 3004
© Copyright 2001 Naval Electronics AB
TV-FM antenna Mark 32ALC
Same colour
BNC-connectors
TV-antenna
Replaceable
amplifier
Antennas are as standard delivered with the secure with vulcanizing silicon rubber tape.
amplifier mounted and sealed with silicon The antenna should be mounted as high as
compound. The coaxial cable is supplied with possible and also as far away as possible from
a female connector which must be carefully transmitting antennas and radars to avoid
sealed after connecting the replaceable interference.
amplifier. Compress the rubber covers and
All measures in mm.
Mounting of cableholder.
Order No. Weight: 5.5 kg

201.095 Standard package: 1
Volume: 59 cdm
Mark 30ALC / 32ALC
Installation manual
The Naval antennas is a range of omni-directional wide band antennas for maritime purposes.
It is based on a construction of loop antennas coupled to band amplifiers with ALC (automatic
level control). The antennas has a very high dynamic range. The antennas are made of ABS
plastic and filled with polyurethane foam. Mounting base in saltwater proof special alloy and
bolts in stainless acid proof steel.
The antennas is tested by “Det Norske Veritas” for the same approval as for radar equipment.
The advantages of a Mark antenna compared to a Yagi antenna system are:
• ALC Automatic level control.

• Rigid, non-corrodible, maintenance free construction.
• Small dimensions and easy to mount.
• Omni-directional, no adjustments.
• Replaceable amplifier.
• Integrated wavetraps VHF/AIS.
name Naval means much more than antennas. Naval operates in Naval Electronics AB
more than 40 countries and has installations on thousands of
Höjdrodergatan 18, SE-212 39 Malmö, Sweden
vessels all over the world.
Tel. +46(0)40-29 20 45. Fax +46(0)40-18 74 13
All specifications stated are subject to change without notice. E-mail:sales@naval.se www.naval.se
Antenna manual 3040 v1.04 05.03.29 page 1/4 © Copyright 2002 Naval Electronics AB
Installation information
Please keep this manual in the amplifier cabinet or by the Radio Officer
For Service contact

Name
Adress
Tel: Fax: Email:
Antenna installed in this system NOTICE: Initial box after installation

Mark 30ALC
Mark 32ALC
Installers signature:
Date:
Ships name:
Distributor
Block diagram of Mark 32ALC
Antenna unit
The antenna should be mounted as high as possible and placed away from funnels, radio communication
antennas and radars to avoid reflections and interferences.
The superior location is at the masthead, with free path in all directions. The antenna can be mounted on a
vibration proof mast, tube or mounting bracket.
The coaxial cable downlead, should be well protected and secured to the mast. Unload the downlead cable by
means of cable clamps and protect it from mechanical damage.
Avoid outdoor cable joints, but if necessary, make sure it is waterproof, by using self-vulcanizing rubber tape or
similar. Avoid excessive bending of the coaxial cable.
Factors, such as transmitting power, polarization, radiation angle and antenna height affect the received signal
strength.
Tune your Radio/TV-set and check sound/picture quality.
Note. In some ports severe reflections from buildings,

cranes etc; can cause distortion due to the nature of the
omni-directional receiving antenna. In some areas, close to
transmitters, overloading of the amplifier and/or Radio/TV-set
is possible. Under these circumstances do not
interfere with the installation or the Radio/TV-set.
Accessories
Mounting bracket in stainless steel 50 mm
with adjustable angle.
Length: 400 mm, Height: 215 m
4 pcs of M8x20 stainless steel hex bolt and
4 pcs of M8 locking nut in stainless steel
included.
2 pcs of U-bolts with nut is local supply.
Order no: 201.351
See leaflet 3012
Changing the amplifier TV-antenna
Antennas are as standard SameColour

colourmark
delivered with the amplifier Red: Mark 20CA
mounted and sealed with silicon

compound. The coaxial cable is
Yellow: Mark 22CA
*
supplied with a female connector BNC-connectors
Replaceable
which must be carefully amplifier
sealed after connecting the
* *
SIL
replaceable amplifier. Compress
ICO
the rubber covers and secure with
N
vulcanizing silicon rubber tape.
(* local supply)
Mechanical measurements All measures in mm.
Mounting of cable holder
Trouble shooting Antenna identification

If the system is not working satisfactory, please check (to be stated when claim is made)
the following:
1. Proper supply voltage to powersupply
2. Connections
3. Output voltage from powersupply to antenna
(should be +15 V DC)
4. Antenna current (approx. 130-150 mA)
Product Order No. Weight Standard Volume

package
Mark 30ALC 201.090 5.5 kg 1 59 cdm
Mark 32ALC 201.095 5.5 kg 1 59 cdm
Mounting bracket 201.351 1.5 kg 1 4.4 cdm
(see leaflet 3012)
ANTENNA CONTROL UNIT
SEA TEL MODEL

DAC-2202
OPERATOR MANUAL
FOR SEA TEL DAC-2202 ANTENNA CONTROL UNIT
Antenna Serial Number: ____________________________

DAC-2202 Serial Number: ___________________________
Sea Tel, Inc. Sea Tel Europe

4030 Nelson Avenue Unit 1, Orion Industrial Centre
Concord, CA 94520 Wide Lane, Swaythling
Tel: (925) 798-7979 Southampton, UK S0 18 2HJ
Fax: (925) 798-7986 Tel: 44 (0)23 80 671155
Email: seatel@cobham.com Fax: 44 (0)23 80 671166
Web: : www.cobham.com\seatel Email: seatel@cobham.com
Web: www.cobham.com\seatel
Sea Tel Inc doing business as Cobham SATCOM

July 2, 2010 Document. No. 131040 Revision B1
These commodities, technology or software were exported from the United States in
accordance with the Export Administration Regulations. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is
prohibited.
Sea Tel Marine Stabilized Antenna systems are manufactured in the United States of
America.
Sea Tel is an ISO 9001:2000 registered company. Certificate Number 19.2867 was issued
August 12, 2005. Sea Tel was originally registered on November 09, 1998.
R&TTE The Sea Tel DAC-2202, or DAC-2302, Antenna Control Unit used with the Sea Tel Antenna
complies with the requirements for Radio and Telecommunication Terminal Equipment. A
copy of the R&TTE Declaration of Conformity for this equipment is contained in the Antenna
CE Manual for your system.
The Sea Tel DAC-2202, or DAC-2302, Antenna Control Unit contains FCC compliant supervisory software to
continuously monitor the pedestal pointing accuracy and use it to control the “Transmit Mute” function of the
satellite modem to satisfy the provisions of FCC 47 C.F.R. § 25.222(a)(l)(iii). A copy of the FCC Declaration of
Conformity for this equipment is contained in the Antenna Manual for your system.
Copyright Notice
All Rights Reserved. The information contained in this document is proprietary to Sea Tel, Inc.. This document
may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without prior consent of Sea Tel, Inc. The information in
this document is subject to change without notice. Copyright © 2010 Sea Tel, Inc is doing business as
Cobham SATCOM.
This document has been registered with the U.S. Copyright Office.
Revision History
REV ECO# Date Description By

X N/A September 8, 2009 PRELIMINARY Release. MDN
A N/A September 21, 2009 Production Release MDN
B 6990 December 7, 2009 Update text to include GSR2 software functions MDN
C N/A June 30, 2010 Update text to include GSR3 software functions MDN
ii
Table of Contents Series 09 Broadband At Sea
1. QUICK START OPERATION – INTRODUCTION...................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1. QUICK START OPERATION ........................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2. FRONT PANEL LAYOUT .................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.3. BASIC FUNCTION OF FRONT PANEL KEYS ................................................................................................................................................. 1-2
1.4. BASIC DESCRIPTION OF FRONT PANEL STATUS LEDS ........................................................................................................................... 1-2
2. OPERATION ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1. DISPLAY & ENTRY OPERATION MENUS ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2. OPERATION FLOWCHART ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2.1. Ship Information Menus. .......................................................................................................................................................2-3
2.2.2. Satellite Information Menus................................................................................................................................................2-3
2.2.3. Antenna Information Menus. ..............................................................................................................................................2-6
2.2.4. Status information menus.....................................................................................................................................................2-7
2.2.5. SETUP Parameter display and entry menus. ...............................................................................................................2-9
2.3. TRACKING OPERATION ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-9
2.3.1. DishScan Operation ..................................................................................................................................................................2-9
2.4. SEARCHING OPERATION .............................................................................................................................................................................2-10
2.4.1. Default Standard (Box) Search Pattern .......................................................................................................................2-10
2.4.2. Inclined Orbit Search Pattern ..........................................................................................................................................2-11
2.4.3. No Gyro Search Pattern ......................................................................................................................................................2-12
2.5. AUTO-POLARIZATION OPERATION...........................................................................................................................................................2-13
2.6. RADOME ASSEMBLY OPERATION ..............................................................................................................................................................2-13
iii
Series 09 Broadband At Sea Table of Contents
iv
Quick Start Operation – Introduction Series 09 Broadband At Sea
1. Quick Start Operation – Introduction

When power is turned ON, the ACU Display will initially show “SEA TEL INC - MASTER” and the ACU software version (ie
DAC-2202 VER 6.xx ). 10 seconds later, the display will switch to “SEA TEL INC - REMOTE” and “INITIALIZING” for
approximately two minutes while the Pedestal Control Unit (PCU) completes initialization of the antenna pedestal and then
reports its Model & Software version.
1.1. Quick Start Operation

If your system has been set up correctly and the ship has not moved since the system was used last. Operation of the
system from a cold start involves the following steps.
1. Turn on the AC power switches for the Antenna Control Unit (ACU) and other Below Decks Equipment..
2. Press NEXT until the Ship menu is displayed to check the Latitude, Longitude and Heading values. Latitude
and Longitude should still be correct, but may be updated if necessary. Heading, in some cases, will be 000.0
and you will have to enter the initial value of the ships current heading. Entry of ships heading is not required
when your system is connected to a 1:1 Synchro or NMEA 0183 Heading Gyro Compass output. To correct
the Heading value, press ENTER 3 times to select ship's heading (HDG) entry mode. Use the LEFT arrow to
bring the cursor up under the ones digit, then if desired, increment/decrement it using the UP/DOWN arrow
keys. Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow keys to select other digits to modify and the UP/DOWN arrow key to
modify them as needed to enter the current ships gyro heading. Press ENTER to save the value. Press NEXT
to return to the Ship display menu.
3. If setup correctly, the ACU should automatically target the last satellite that was used. If it does not, press
NEXT to the Satellite display menu so you can manually target the satellite. If you are targeting the SAME
satellite longitude as was used last; Press ENTER, then the LEFT (or RIGHT) arrow and then ENTER to
target the same satellite. If you are targeting a different satellite you will need to change the tracking
parameters and then target the desired satellite, refer to the operation section for the Satellite menu below.
A. If no signal is found: The Tracking LED will flash for a short period of time (per the SEARCH DELAY parameter)
followed by the Search LED coming ON. The ACU will automatically move the antenna in a spiral SEARCH pattern
until the ACU receives a signal (AGC) value that is greater than the threshold value. Tracking will take over (Tracking
LED ON) and automatically peak the antenna position for highest receive signal level from the satellite which has been
acquired.
B. If satellite signal is found AND network lock is achieved: The received signal level (AGC) will be higher
than the threshold value. Tracking will take over (Tracking LED ON) and automatically peak the antenna position for
highest receive signal level from the satellite and the satellite modem will get modem lock/receive sync. When the
ACU has signal above threshold AND modem has network lock the antenna will continue to track the satellite.
B. If satellite signal is found but network lock is NOT achieved: If you’re system has been setup to use the
network lock/satellite ID output from the satellite modem; When signal above threshold is found but the modem does
NOT get network lock (receive sync), the ACU will re-target in an attempt to find the satellite which has signal AND
network lock. This could be due to the antenna targeting the wrong satellite, polarization failure, modem failure (not
getting receive sync) or network failure (not allowing the modem to get receive sync). The ACU will continue to re-
target.
Upon completion of the above, the system will continue to operate automatically indefinitely until; AC power to
the system is interrupted OR The satellite signal is blocked OR The ship sails into an area of insufficient satellite
signal level.
1.2. Front Panel Layout
1-1
Series 09 Broadband At Sea Quick Start Operation – Introduction
1.3. Basic Function of Front Panel Keys

Keyboard operation is very simple and straightforward. Basic function of each key is:
Press NEXT to cycle through the four main menus; Ship, Satellite, Antenna and Status (refer
to the Operation Flowcharts).
Press TRACK key to toggle the state of Tracking, ON/OFF. If SEARCH is ON, pressing the
TRACK key will turn search OFF.
When the Antenna main menu is displayed, pressing the LEFT arrow moves the antenna left
(CCW or down in azimuth). Pressing the RIGHT arrow to move the antenna right (CW or up
in azimuth).
In any sub-menu, pressing the LEFT or RIGHT arrow enters editing mode and brings up a
cursor in the display. When the cursor is under a character, it is selected and can be changed
(see UP/DOWN arrow below).
(Setup) - Press and release BOTH the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys to access the save
parameters window. Press & Hold for six seconds to access the setup parameters (refer to
the Setup section of this manual).
When the Antenna main menu is displayed, press UP arrow to move the antenna up in
elevation or the DOWN arrow to move the antenna down in elevation.
Press the UP/DOWN arrow cycle Up and Down through the sub-menus.
When a sub-menu item is being edited, use the UP/DOWN to increment/decrement the
selected character. This steps the selected entry one increment per sequential key-press or
rapidly increments the selected entry when pressed & held.
At any main menu level, press ENTER to access the sub-menu items.
When viewing one of the sub-menus, pressing the ENTER key will step down through the
sub-menu items, like the DOWN arrow does.
When editing, the cursor is visible under a character in a sub-menu (whether it has been
changed or not), press ENTER to execute the present value, and return to display mode of
that sub-menu. This does NOT save the new value to NVRAM.
Press RESET to reset all the processors in the Antenna Control Unit. It does NOT reset the
antenna.
1.4. Basic Description of Front Panel Status LEDs

The basic description of the front panel LED states are:
Tracking - (Green LED)
ON indicates that the ACU has identified and is actively tracking the desired satellite to optimize the signal
level (AGC).
Blinking indicates that the ACU is in search delay or is analyzing a satellite signal.
OFF indicates that Tracking is OFF.
Searching - (Yellow LED)
ON indicates that the ACU is actively searching for your satellite signal.
OFF indicates that SEARCH is OFF.
Target - (Yellow LED)
ON indicates that the antenna is TARGETING (driving) to the specified Azimuth and/or Elevation position(s).
Power - (Green LED)
ON indicates that the Antenna Control Unit is energized.
Initializing - (Green LED)
ON indicates that the Antenna is initializing. Initialization of the antenna will take approximately two
minutes.
1-2
Quick Start Operation – Introduction Series 09 Broadband At Sea
Error - (Red LED)

ON indicates that one, or more, discrete system errors have occurred. Refer to Status – Error Code
information menu to determine which error(s) have occurred.
OFF indicates that no errors have occurred.
1-3
Series 09 Broadband At Sea Quick Start Operation – Introduction
1-4
Operation Series 09 Broadband At Sea
2. Operation
2.1. Display & Entry Operation Menus

The operation menus are arranged in four groups. Use the NEXT key to cycle through the groups, use the ENTER key
to access the sub-menu of a selected group and then use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to move up and down the sub-
menu items.
2.2. Operation Flowchart

The next page is to overall operation flowchart for the DAC-2202
2-1
Series 09 Broadband At Sea Operation
Operation Flowchart
2-2
2.2.1. Ship Information Menus.
Display Meaning
LAT 38 N LON 122 W Press the NEXT key until the Ship menu is displayed. This is the display of the
HDG 000.0 000.0 current Ship information.
LAT 38.0 N Press ENTER to access the Latitude sub-menu.
Latitude is used to calculate Azimuth, Elevation and Polarization for the desired
satellite position. Latitude is updated automatically by the GPS mounted on the
pedestal.
To manually update Latitude, press the LEFT/RIGHT arrow to enter edit mode. This
will display a cursor under character to be modified. Press the UP/DOWN arrow to
increment/decrement this character. Press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow again to select
another digit, or the North/South character, to edit. Press ENTER when you are
finished editing the Latitude position.
LON 122.0 W Press DOWN or ENTER to access the Longitude entry mode.
Longitude is used to calculate Azimuth, Elevation and Polarization for the desired
satellite position. Longitude is updated automatically by the GPS mounted on the
pedestal.
To manually update Longitude, press the LEFT/RIGHT arrow to enter edit mode.
This will display a cursor under character to be modified. Press the UP/DOWN arrow
to increment/decrement this character. Press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow again to
select another digit, or the East/West character, to edit. Press ENTER when you are
finished editing the Longitude position.
The displayed heading is comprised of two values. The left is the integrated
HDG 000.0 000.0 response from the antenna pedestal and right is the local input from the
gyrocompass.
Press DOWN or ENTER to access the Heading entry mode. Heading is used to
provide “True” Azimuth antenna position. This must be True north input, NOT
Magnetic north.
If the heading input source is NMEA0183 data, or 1:1 Synchro, no initial heading
entry is required. For all other acceptable Gyro Compass input types the HDG
MUST be initially set whenever the ACU power is turned ON.
To manually update, press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key to bring the cursor up
under the character to the left, or right, of the decimal point respectively. Continue
to move the cursor until the desired character to be edited is underscored (selected).
Use the UP or DOWN arrow keys to increment or decrement the selected character.
Press ENTER to set the new heading value and return to heading display OR Press
NEXT to abort and return to the main Ship display
During subsequent normal operation, the HDG value should automatically follow the
Ships Gyro Compass correctly (HDG value should agree exactly with the value
observed on the Gyro Compass).
2.2.2. Satellite Information Menus.
Display Meaning
SAT 101 W THRS 1234 Press the NEXT key until the main Satellite menu is displayed. This is the display of
FREQ 1100 NID 1234 the current Satellite tracking information.
NID value displayed is the Network ID which is currently being received from the
satellite that the antenna is pointed to. If your ACU has an L-Band SCPC receiver in it,
“ABCD” will be displayed here. If your ACU has an L-Band NBIF receiver in it, “1234”
will be displayed here. If your ACU has a 70, or 140, MHz SCPC narrow band receiver
in it, 0000 will always be shown.
2-3
SAT 101.0 W Press ENTER to access the Satellite Longitude sub-menu. Satellite longitude is
used to calculate antenna Elevation, Azimuth and Polarity pointing angles from the
ships current location and heading.
under the tenths digit to the left, or the E/W character to the right respectively.
Continue to move the cursor until the desired character to be edited is underscored
(selected). Use the UP or DOWN arrow keys to increment or decrement the selected
character.
Range of acceptable longitude values is 000.0 East to 180.0 East/West to 000.0 West,
however longitude may be entered as 000.0-359.9 East if you prefer (181.0 East is
the same as 179.0 West). Tenths may be entered (and will be used internally) but the
display will round off to nearest whole degree.
When the hemisphere character is selected press the UP or the DOWN key to toggle
East/West hemisphere.
Press ENTER to target the displayed satellite position OR Press NEXT to abort and
return to the main Satellite menu.
THRS 1234 Press DOWN or ENTER to access the Threshold sub-menu. Threshold is a
minimum AGC value for the ACU to determine if satellite signal has been located or
has been lost.
Default setup is Automatic Threshold, which sets the Threshold value to nnnn counts
of AGC above the average off satellite AGC value whenever the ACU Searches,
Targets or Unwraps (refer to your antenna manual for the default setting for AUTO
THRES parameter).
To manually set threshold; Note the Peak “on satellite” AGC value, move AZ or EL and
note the “off satellite” (Noise Floor) AGC value. Calculate the difference between
Peak AGC and Noise Floor AGC. Threshold should be set to 1/3 (to ½) of the
Difference above Noise Floor.
In DVB Mode Press DOWN or ENTER to access the Sat ID Receiver Frequency entry mode.
The individual settings of the Satellite Identification tracking receiver and the current
signal level (AGC) will be displayed in each of the sub-menus below. To enable SCPC
FREQ 1100 AGC 1234
mode you must first set the FEC parameter to “SCPC”.
In SCPC Mode In DVB Mode: FREQ #### AGC 1234
In SCPC Mode: MHz #### AGC 1234
MHz 1111 AGC 1234
To manually set, press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key to bring the cursor up under the
character to the left, or right, of the decimal point respectively. Continue to move
the cursor until the desired character to be edited is underscored (selected). Use the
UP or DOWN arrow keys to increment or decrement the selected character.
If your ACU has an L-Band DVB receiver you will tune FREQ to 950-2150MHz. If
your ACU has an L-Band SCPC or NBIF receiver you will tune the MHZ to 950-
2150MHz (and then tune the KHZ value in the next step). If your ACU has a 70MHz
SCPC receiver you will tune the MHZ to 52-88MHz (and then tune the KHZ value in
the next step). If your ACU has a 140MHz SCPC receiver you will tune the MHZ to
104-176MHz (and then tune the KHZ value in the next step). Contact your dealer
and/or Service Provider for the correct tracking parameters.
If your system is configured to use an external AGC input, you must set
Frequency to 0000. This will cause the ACU to read the input from the “AGC” &
“GND” terminal connections on the Terminal Mounting Strip Assembly.
Press ENTER to tune the receiver to this frequency and return to the frequency
display OR Press NEXT to abort and return to the main Satellite display.
2-4
In DVB Mode Press DOWN or ENTER to access the Sat ID Receiver Baud entry mode. This is
used to input the numeric value of Baud Rate (symbol rate) OR of the KHz value of
the desired the Intermediate Frequency (950-2150) you want to use for Tracking.
Baud 20000 AGC 1234
This setting of the Satellite Identification tracking receiver and the current signal level
In SCPC/NBIF Mode (AGC) will be displayed.
In DVB Mode: BAUD 20000 AGC 1234
KHz 0999 AGC 1234 In SCPC Mode: KHz #### AGC 1234
under the character to the left, or right, of the decimal point respectively. Continue
to move the cursor until the desired character to be edited is underscored (selected).
Use the UP or DOWN arrow keys to increment or decrement the selected character.
DVB: Current receivers can be set to any desired Baud Rate between 3000 and
30000. It should be set to the symbol/baud rate of the digital carrier you chose to
use for tracking. This setting also changes the bandwidth of the receiver. Baud
setting of equal to or less than-5000 sets the receiver to 7.5 MHz bandwidth. A Baud
Rate of 5001 and greater sets the receiver bandwidth to 20MHz.
SCPC: Key in the desired KHz frequency value you wish to use for tracking.
Press ENTER to set the desired Baud/KHz and return to the Baud/KHz display OR
Press NEXT to abort and return to the main Satellite display.
Press DOWN or ENTER to access the Tone sub-menu. This setting is used to turn
Tone OFF AGC 1234 ON or OFF a continuous 22 KHz Tone output from the tracking receiver.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key to display a cursor underneath the current state.
Use the UP or DOWN arrow key to change states.
ON is used to select High Band frequencies and OFF is used to select Low Band
frequencies from the matrix switch.
Press ENTER to set the desired tone setting OR Press NEXT to abort and return to
the main Satellite display.
Press DOWN or ENTER to access the Volt sub-menu. This setting is used to select
Volt HORZ AGC 1234 the Voltage output from the tracking receiver, based on the desired received
transponder polarity. Available selections are; HORZ (18VDC), LHCP (18VDC), VERT
(13VDC) or RHCP (13VDC).
To change selection, press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key to display a cursor
underneath the current selection. Use the UP or DOWN arrow key to scroll through
the selections.
Press ENTER to set the desired Voltage setting OR Press NEXT to abort and return
to the main Satellite display.
Press DOWN or ENTER to access the FEC sub-menu. Select the Forward Error
FEC AUTO AGC 1234 Correction rate of the desired tracking signal. 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 6/7, 7/8 , AUTO or
SCPC. AUTO automatically scans through all the standard DVB & DSS FEC rates.
NOTE: When SCPC is selected, the FREQ parameter changes to read MHz and the
BAUD parameter changes to read KHz.
Continue pressing the UP/DOWN arrow key to toggle through the available forced *
(star’ed) FEC rates. If the satellite does not generate an NID but does have a unique
combination of FREQ, BAUD and FEC lock, select the appropriate FEC* choice from
this list. The ACU will then generate its own unique forced NID (FFFE for DSS signals
or FFFD for DVB signals) to represent the desired satellite. You will need to enter this
pseudo NID in the NID setting below.
FEC MUST be set to SCPC if you have any one of the SCPC narrow band receivers
installed in your ACU (L-Band SCPC, 70MHz SCPC or 140MHZ SCPC).
under the current setting. Use the UP or DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the
available FEC selections.
Press ENTER to set the desired selection OR Press NEXT to abort and return to the
main Satellite display.
2-5
Press DOWN or ENTER to access the SAT SKEW sub-menu. This setting is used
SKEW 000 AGC 1234 to add or subtract Polarization skew for the satellite currently being or intended to be
tracked.
Each increment equals one degree of polarization rotation. Increment to “+02” for a
satellite with a total positive 2 degree polarization skew (The intentional satellite skew
+/- required skew for X-Pol isolation). Likewise decrement down to “-02” for a satellite
with a total negative 2 degree polarization skew. Use of this parameter requires
mechanical feed calibration for proper operation. Refer to Polang Adjustment
procedure in the maintenance section of your antenna manual for detailed
instructions on how to perform this calibration procedure (POL OFFSET).
Adjustments of this parameter is required while running Cross-Pol isolation tests
during the commissioning of a VSAT system (apparent skew) or is entered as an
absolute satellite skew angle value (intentional) when switching between satellites.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key to display a cursor underneath the current value.
Use the UP or DOWN arrow key to increment or decrement value.
Press ENTER to set the desired SKEW setting OR Press NEXT to abort and return to
the main Satellite display.
Press DOWN or ENTER to access the NID sub-menu. This setting, a four digit
NID 0000 AGC 1234 HEX value with a valid range of 0000-FFFF, is based on the desired received
transponders’ Network ID (NID). If this parameter is provided in decimal format, it
will have to be converted to hexadecimal for entry.
Set the NID value to 0000 if;
• The signal you intend to track does not contain a valid NID.
• You do not want to use satellite identification function.
• You are using the external AGC input source from the satellite
modem (most commonly used in the 09 Series antennas) which
has been provided to you in your system configuration.
• You are experiencing a hardware/software issue which is preventing the
ACU from decoding the NID and you want to temporarily disable this
function.
under a character. Continue to move the cursor until the desired character to be
edited is underscored (selected). Use the UP or DOWN arrow keys to increment or
decrement the selected character.
Press ENTER to set the desired NID OR Press NEXT to abort and return to the main
Satellite display.
2.2.3. Antenna Information Menus.
Display Meaning
AZ 123.4 EL 056.7 Press the NEXT key until the Antenna main menu is displayed. This is the display
REL 234.5 AGC 1234 of the current Antenna information.
While in the antenna main menu pressing the UP, DOWN, LEFT or RIGHT arrows
moves the antenna in those respective directions. Quick pres & release the desired
arrow key will step the antenna in small individual increments. Press & Hold the
desired arrow key to slew the antenna in rapid steps.
2-6
AZ 123.4 Press ENTER to access the Azimuth sub-menu. This allows you to target the
# AGC 1234 antenna to desired Azimuth position. The current IF signal level (AGC) is displayed
to assist you in manually peaking AZ for best signal level. Range of input is 000.0-
359.9.
To target a new azimuth position, press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key to bring the
cursor up under the character to the left, or right, of the decimal point respectively.
Continue to move the cursor until the desired character is selected. Use the UP or
DOWN arrow keys to increment or decrement the selected character.
Press ENTER to target the antenna to the new Azimuth position OR Press NEXT to
abort and return to the main Antenna display.
The number (2, 4, 6 or 8) you see periodically flashing in the lower left of the
display are normal DishScan tracking signals.
EL 056.7 Press DOWN or ENTER to access the Elevation sub-menu. This allows you to
# AGC 1234 target the antenna to a desired Elevation position. Range of input is 00.0-90.0.
To target a new elevation position, press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key to bring the
cursor up under the character to the left, or right, of the decimal point respectively.
Continue to move the cursor until the desired character is selected. Use the UP or
DOWN arrow keys to increment or decrement the selected character.
Press ENTER to target the antenna to the new elevation position OR Press NEXT
to abort and return to the main Antenna display.
The number (2, 4, 6 or 8) you see periodically flashing in the lower left of the
display are normal DishScan tracking signals.
Press DOWN or ENTER to access the Relative Azimuth sub-menu. This sub-
REL 234.5 AGC 1234 menu displays the current Relative azimuth position of the antenna.
If this ACU is connected to a LIMITED azimuth antenna (has cable “UNWRAP”), the
value displayed here is the antenna position relative to the bow of the ship, ranging
from 020.0-700.0, with 360.0 indicating when antenna is pointed in-line with the
bow. UNWRAP should occur at REL 023.0 & 697.0.
If this ACU is connected to a UNLIMITED azimuth antenna (no mechanical stops in
azimuth rotation), the value displayed here is the antenna position relative to the
bow of the ship, ranging from 000.0-359.9, with 000.0 indicating when antenna is
pointed in-line with the bow.
The REL position of the antenna is also used to set Radiation Hazard & Blockage
Mapping points (refer to Setup chapter of your antenna manual).
Press DOWN or ENTER to access the Polarization sub-menu. Auto-Polarization
POL 0000 AGC 1234 is the DEFAULT method of polarization adjustment. To optimize, or manually adjust,
polarization refer to the Setup and Maintenance sections of this manual
2.2.4. Status information menus.
Display Meaning
SEA TEL,INC - MASTER Press the NEXT key until the Status menu is displayed. This is the power-up
DAC-2202 VER 6.05t display of the Master (ACU) and Remote (PCU) Model & Software Version(s)
information.
2-7
CONTROL Press the ENTER key once to display the Status – Control Tracking sub-menu.
TRACKING OFF C This is the display of the current Tracking and Band Selection information.
To turn the Tracking status On or Off, press the Track key, or press the RIGHT
arrow to bring up a cursor under the current tracking condition and then Press the
UP arrow to toggle status ON/OFF. Press Enter to exit the selection mode.
To toggle the Tracking band selection, Press the RIGHT or LEFT arrow and then
press the DOWN arrow to toggle through the list of possible BAND selections (i.e.
KuLo, KuHi, DLA or DSS). The actual band selections available are dependent on
the parameter value entered for TRACK DISP. Press ENTER to submit and exit the
selection entry mode.
Band selection controls the local logic output state of SW1 output terminal on the
25 pin Terminal Mounting Strip PCB and if configured, remote C/Ku relays on the
antenna pedestal. When KuHi/DSS band is selected the SW1 output will be
shorted to ground (current sink of 0.5 amps max or when KuLo/DLA band is
selected the SW1 output is open (floating).) to control (but not limited to):
• Band selection tone generators
• Coax switches.
If AZ Limits have been set to define a known blockage zone “BLOCKED” will
appear in place of ON/OFF tracking status when the antenna is in the described
blockage zone(s). This Tracking condition controls the local logic output state of
SW2 output terminal on the 25 pin Terminal Mounting Strip PCB.
If the Antenna Pedestal, during normal operation fails to meet FCC stabilization
compliance “MUTE” will be appear in the place of the ON/OFF tracking status
Whenever in the “BLOCKED” or “MUTE” tracking condition, the SW2 output will be
shorted (or open, if SYSTEM TYPE is set to reverse this logic state) to ground,
providing a current sink of 0.5 amps max, to control (but not limited to):
• Below decks dual antenna coax switches
• TX inhibit control to a satellite modem for radiation hazard control
• TX mute for FCC compliance.
To test the blockage output, press the RIGHT arrow key 5 times (to bring up and
move the cursor to the far right). Press the UP arrow to simulate BLOCKED
condition and short (or open, if SYSTEM TYPE is set to reverse this logic state) on
SW2. Press the LEFT arrow key twice and then press the UP arrow key to turn the
BLOCKED condition OFF and open (or short, if SYSTEM TYPE is set to reverse this
logic state) on SW2.
CONTROL Press DOWN arrow or ENTER to access the Control Status – Search sub
SEARCH 2 OFF menu. This is a display of the current Search condition.
: To initiate an automated SEARCH, press the RIGHT arrow to bring up a cursor
under the current Search status, and then press the UP arrow.
To terminate a SEARCH in process, press the RIGHT arrow to bring up a cursor
under the current Search status, and then press the DOWN arrow or press the
TRACK key
Press Enter to exit the Search Control mode.
2-8
STATUS Press DOWN or ENTER to access the Status – Error menu. This is a display of
ERROR LLLL RRRR errors that have been detected by the system
LLLL - Comms Error Count - The first four numeric digits indicates the
number of times that a Pedestal M&C communication message (between the ACU
and PCU) was not received correctly. Occasional counts are acceptable but more
than 10 per minute indicates a problem that needs attention (refer to
Troubleshooting section).
RRRR - Error Code - The second set of four numeric digits indicates the SUM
of the discrete error(s) that have occurred. It does not indicate how many of a
particular error have occurred.
128 Satellite Out Of Range
16 DishScan Pulse Error
8 Pedestal Error (NOTE: An error code 8 requires an additional PCU Query to
determine fault type, refer to the maintenance section of this manual for further information
4 ACU-PCU Communication Failure
2 Wrong Synchro Converter Type
1 Gyro Read Error
Refer to the Maintenance section of this manual for troubleshooting frequent or
constant errors.
Pressing UP arrow key and then the ENTER key clears error count, status code and
extinguishes the Error LED. Refer to troubleshooting section of manual if error
does not clear.
STATUS Press DOWN or ENTER to access the Status – Remote Aux menu. Diagnostic
REMOTE AUX 0000 display of Remote auxiliary read. Typically, this display is to indicate Temperature
or EIRP readings from the antenna, if properly configured to do so; otherwise, there
are no operational or diagnostic uses of this sub-menu.
2.2.5. SETUP Parameter display and entry menus.

Access to system setup parameters is only required during installation or repair of your antenna system.
These parameters should only be changed by an authorized service technician.
CAUTION: Improper setting(s) of these parameters can and will cause your system not to perform
properly.
Refer to the SETUP information in the Installation section of this manual.
2.3. Tracking Operation

Tracking, which is controlled by the ACU, is fine pointing angle adjustments to the antenna pedestal to maximize the
level of the satellite signal being received. You can, as described in the Status Information Menu’s section of this
manual, toggle Tracking ON or OFF by pressing the Track key regardless of what current menu or sub-menu is being
displayed.
2.3.1. DishScan Operation

To control tracking this system uses a variation of Conical scanning, called DishScan, which continuously
drives the antenna in a very small diameter circle (defined by DishScan Amplitude) at 60 RPM. This circle is
defined in 4 “quadrants”, UP, DOWN, LEFT, and RIGHT (by the DishScan Phase). The received signal is
evaluated throughout each full circle rotation of the antenna, by referencing timing pulses issued by the PCU
in each of the 4 quadrants (defined by DishScan Phase), to determine where the strongest signal level is and
will issue the appropriate Azimuth and/or Elevation steps to the antenna, as needed, 60 times per minute
towards that quadrant.
While viewing the AZIMUTH or ELEVATION sub-menu, the DishScan drive commands issued (2, 4, 6 or 8) will
be visible in the lower left corner of the display. Each 2 you see flash is a command sent to step Elevation
down, each 4 is a command sent to step down in Azimuth (CCW), each 6 is a command sent to step up in
Azimuth (CW), each 8 is a command sent to step Elevation up.
When Tracking is turned OFF these commands indicate drive that is required, but will not be sent to the
antenna to be carried out.
2-9
If the antenna is already perfectly pointed, the signal received (AGC) throughout each of the 4 quadrants will
be equal and no tracking decision is made. If the dish is slightly mispointed, a portion of the circle movement
will have higher signal level than the rest of the circle. DishScan will then issue a step in Azimuth, and/or
Elevation, to move the antenna in the direction of the stronger signal. [EXAMPLE: If the dish is mispointed
slightly to the LEFT of the satellite peak; as DishScan drives the antenna through one circle rotation it will
evaluate that the signal is slightly higher to the RIGHT, therefore, a Azimuth UP (RIGHT) step will be issued to
the antenna].
For proper Tracking performance, the EL STEP SIZE, AZ STEP SIZE, STEP INTEGRAL parameters must
all be set to Factory Default value of 0 and DishScan must be turned on. You must also correctly set the
internal tracking receiver settings. Refer to the “Satellite” menu operation in the above section for adjustment
instructions.
2.4. Searching Operation

The ACU will initiate an automated search pattern after AGC falls below the current Threshold setting (indicates that
satellite signal has been lost). The SEARCH DELAY parameter sets the amount of delay, in seconds, that the ACU will
wait after AGC has fallen below the threshold value before it starts a search.
Search can be initiated manually by pressing the MODE button twice to access the SEARCH sub-menu and then press
the UP arrow key (starts a search from the current antenna position). While in the SEARCH sub-menu, pressing the
DOWN arrow key will stop the current search.
Search is terminated automatically when the AGC level exceeds the threshold value and Tracking begins.
The ACU can be configured to use one of three search patterns. Each of the search patterns are described below.
Each description includes information about the settings involved in configuring the ACU to select that particular
pattern and the values that those settings would be set to, to optimize the pattern for your antenna model and the
frequency band being used.
The dimensions and timing of the search pattern are determined by the SETUP parameters SEARCH INC, SEARCH
LIMIT, SEARCH DELAY and SWEEP INC. Search is also affected by the Threshold and the internal receiver
settings under the Satellite menu. To change any one of these parameters, refer to “Changing the Search Parameters”
procedures below.
All three search patterns are conducted in a two-axis pattern consisting of alternate movements in azimuth and
elevation or along the polarization angle. The size and direction of the movements are increased and reversed every
other time resulting in an increasing spiral pattern as shown.
2.4.1. Default Standard (Box) Search Pattern

The factory default search pattern in the ACU is a standard “box” pattern. You configure the ACU to use this
pattern by using the following settings:
SEARCH INC - set to the default value for the frequency band that your antenna model is currently
being used for (typically 15 counts).
SEARCH LIMIT – initially set to the default value. After targeting has been optimized, the search
limit can be adjusted if desired.
SEARCH DELAY – default, or any number of seconds from 1-255 that you would prefer that the
ACU wait before starting an automatic search.
SWEEP INC – default value (this parameter is not used in this search pattern).
GYRO TYPE – must NOT be set to zero.
SAT REF mode – may be ON if you are experiencing frequent, or constant, gyro read errors (error
code 0001). Must be ON if you are using NMEA Gyro input.
Target any satellite longitude value which includes even tenths digit values (ie SAT 101.0 W or SAT 101.2 W).
If the desired satellite longitude includes an odd tenths digit, you must round it up, or down, one tenth to
make the tenths digit EVEN. The Antenna Control Unit calculates the Azimuth, Elevation and Polarization
values it will use to target the antenna. Initially the antenna will go to a position that is 8 degrees above the
calculated azimuth, until Azimuth, Elevation and Polarization have had time to complete adjustment. Then
the antenna will drive down to the calculated elevation, which is the “Start” of the search pattern in the
graphic below.
Then the antenna will search up in azimuth one Search Increment, search up one Search Increment in
elevation, search down two Search Increments in azimuth, search down two Search Increments in elevation,
etc until Search Limit is reached. When the end of the search pattern is reached, the ACU will retarget the
antenna to the start point shown in the graphic below.
2-10
If the desired signal is found (AND network lock is achieved in the satellite modem) at this position, or
anywhere within the search pattern, the ACU will terminate search and go into Tracking mode. If the desired
signal is not found the ACU will wait SEARCH DELAY seconds and then begin the search pattern again. This
cycle will repeat until the desired satellite signal is found or the operator intervenes.
2.4.2. Inclined Orbit Search Pattern

Some older satellites, in order to save fuel to keep them exactly positioned over the Equator, are in an
inclined geosynchronous orbit. The satellite remains geosynchronous but is no longer geostationary. From a
fixed observation point on Earth, it would appear to trace out a figure-eight with lobes oriented north-
southward once every twenty-four hours. The north-south excursions of the satellite may be too far off the
center point for a default box search pattern to find that satellite at all times during the 24 hour period.
You can configure the ACU to do a special search pattern for a satellite that is in an inclined orbit by using the
following settings:
SEARCH LIMIT – leave this set to the default value for your antenna model.
SWEEP INC – set to 192 if your antenna is a Series 04 or Series 06 or Series 09. Set to 193 if your
antenna is a Series 97, Series 00 or Series 07. This parameter sets the sweep increment (shown in
the graphic above) to be +/- 8.0 degrees above/below the satellite arc.
GYRO TYPE – must NOT be set to zero.
SAT REF mode – may be ON if you are experiencing frequent, or constant, gyro read errors (error
code 0001). Must be ON if you are using NMEA Gyro input.
Target the desired satellite longitude value but include an odd tenths digit (ie if you desired to target inclined
satellite 186.0 W you would key in SAT 186.1 W for the ACU to do an inclined search). The Antenna Control
Unit calculates the Azimuth, Elevation and Polarization values it will use to target the antenna.
Initially the antenna will go to a calculated position that is half of SWEEP INCR degrees above, and
perpendicular to, the satellite arc (along the same angle as polarization for the desired satellite). This position
is the “Start” of the search pattern in the graphic above. Then the antenna will drive down along the
polarization angle SWEEP INCR degrees, step one Search Increment to the right (parallel to the satellite arc),
search up along the polarization angle SWEEP INCR degrees, step two Search Increments to the left, search
down, etc expanding out in the search pattern until Search Limit is reached. When the end of the search
pattern is reached, the ACU will retarget the antenna to the calculated Azimuth and Elevation point.
signal is not found the ACU will wait SEARCH DELAY, then target the antenna to start point shown in the
2-11
graphic above and begin the search pattern again. This cycle will repeat until the desired satellite signal is
found or the operator intervenes.
2.4.3. No Gyro Search Pattern

If the ship does not have a gyro compass to use as heading input to the Antenna Control Unit, you may
manually key in the actual heading of the vessel and then re-target the desired satellite, every time you need
to re-target a satellite, or configure the ACU to do a “No Gyro Search Pattern”.
You configure the ACU to use this pattern by using the following settings:
SEARCH LIMIT – leave this set to the default value.
SWEEP INC – Larger antennas should have slower speeds and smaller antennas should have faster
speeds:
Larger antennas should have slower speeds set to 0047 (= 5 degrees/second) for 2.4M to
3.6M antenna systems).
Mid size antennas can be driven a little faster, set to 0063 (= 8 degrees/second) for 2M
antennas models).
Smaller antennas should have faster speeds, set to 0079 (= 18 degrees/second) for all
0.8M to 1.5M antenna models).
GYRO TYPE – MUST be set to zero for this search pattern.
SAT REF mode – MUST be ON for this search pattern.
Target any satellite longitude value which includes even tenths digit values (ie SAT 101.0 W or SAT 101.2 W).
If the desired satellite longitude includes an odd tenths digit, you must round it up, or down, one tenth to
make the tenths digit EVEN. The Antenna Control Unit calculates the Azimuth, Elevation and Polarization
values it will use to target the antenna. However, without heading input, the ACU cannot target a “true
azimuth” position (relative to true North). It will target the antenna to the calculated elevation and a
repeatable “Start” relative azimuth position. In Series 04 antennas this relative position will be 90 degrees
away from the nearest mechanical stop. In all other antennas it will be 000 degrees relative.
Initially the antenna will go to the “Start” relative azimuth position at the calculated elevation. Then the
antenna will search up 450 degrees in azimuth, search up one Search Increment in elevation, search down
450 degrees in azimuth, search down two Search Increments in elevation, etc until Search Limit is reached.
When the end of the search pattern is reached, the ACU will retarget the antenna back to the start point
shown in the graphic below.
signal is not found the ACU will wait SEARCH DELAY seconds and then begin the search pattern again. This
cycle will repeat until the desired satellite signal is found or the operator intervenes.
2-12
2.5. Auto-Polarization Operation

Another feature of the ACU is auto-polarization. The ACU automatically calculates the required polarization angle for
the feed every 2 seconds based on ship's Latitude, Longitude and the Satellite Longitude. If the polarization of the
feed is not properly peaked, the ACU will send a command to the PCU to drive the 24V DC motor drive on the feed to
peak the polarization.
There is no other operation required when the system is in auto-polarization mode (Polang Type 72).
2.6. Radome Assembly Operation

When operating the system it is necessary that the radome access hatch, or door, be closed and secured in place at all
times. This prevents rain, salt water and wind from entering the radome ( water and excessive condensation promote
rust & corrosion of the antenna pedestal and wind gusts will disturb the antenna pointing).
2-13
HIGH QUALITY CATV VSB
RF MODULATOR
A2B ELECTRONICS MODEL

EVA-210
Cable TV and Digital TV specialists
EVA-210
High quality CATV VSB RF modulator
with NICAM sound
PRODUCT INFORMATION
•High quality professional VSB RF modulator
•NICAM stereo sound encoder
•For operation in SMATV and Cable-TV head-ends
•Can be set to any transmission standard
•High output level (>110 dBuV)
•Covers 47-860 MHz
•Low power consumption
•Video (phono) and stereo audio (phono) inputs
•PAL/SECAM/NTSC operation
A2B Electronics AB Phone: +46 141 229100

P.O. Box 14 Fax: +46 141 229101
SE-591 21 Motala e-mail: market@a2b.se
Sweden
web: www.a2b.se
EVA-210
High quality CATV VSB RF modulator
with NICAM sound
DESCRIPTION AND FEATURES MODULATION
The EVA-210 is a Vestigal Sideband (VSB) AM analog, video/audio Standards Programmable to
modulator that can be programmed to different international B/G, I, D/K, H, L, M/N
standards. It is made for adjacent channel operation so that every Modulation video VSB AM , negative or
available channel on a cable TV network can be used. positive depending on programmed
In addition to the analog TV sound the EVA-210 standard
also incorporates a high quality NICAM digital stereo encoder giving Modulation mono audio FM or AM
high quality stereo and surround (if available from program source) depending on programmed standard
audio reception in modern TV sets. Mono subcarrier frequency 4.5 MHz, 5.5
MHz, 6.0 MHz or 6.5 MHz depending on
SETTINGS AND CONTROL standard
Programming and different settings of the unit is made via an RS-232
connector on the front. Software is included for control via Palm RF OUTPUT
handheld computer or standard PC. RF output connector Type F
Channel setting and output level control also available on the front RF output impedance 75 ohm nominal
panel for direct control. RF output 47 - 860 MHz
frequency
VIDEO-AUDIO INPUTS RF output level 110 dBuV,
The stereo audio inputs are summed to give the mono audio variable 0 – 30dB
sound and fed directly to the Nicam stereo encoder.
Video connector: Type phono, yellow, Spurious signals > 60 dB
Video level: 1 Vpp, 75 ohm Suppression
Audio connectors: Type phono, Audio L white, Audio R red
Audio level: 0.77 Vrms nominal, high impedance OTHERS
Power supply 7.5VDC nom. (6 - 9 V)
Power consumption Typ. < 7 W,
Dimensions: 165x105x20 mm
(excluding connectors),
panel 35x128 mm
(7TE x 3HE)
Weight : approx. 330 g
Mounting Direct on wall with
separate bracket or in
19-inch rack box
Controller Palm handcomputer or
PC (software included)
Control connector 9P Dsub, male
Front panel controls Channel setting,
RF output level,Reset
(This specification may be subject to change without notice) Indicator lights on
Operating temperature 0 to +50°C
NICAM 728 (EN 300 163)
A2B Electronics AB Phone: +46 141 229100

P.O. Box 14 Fax: +46 141 229101
SE-591 21 Motala e-mail: market@a2b.se
Sweden
web: www.a2b.se
POWER SUPPLY & BASE UNIT

EPP-100 & EBU-100
ACCESSORIES
ACCESSORIES
EPP-100 Power supply 100 W ESP-100 Power supply 15 W

Art no: 103100.02 Art no: 103200.01
• Power supply for E-series

• 100 W output power
• 11 separate outputs
• 2A current limit on all
outputs
• 7.5V outputs
• Input voltage range 94-
264V
• Mounting in 19" base unit • Power supply for single E-series module
(EBU-100) • Max 25 W output power, 15W continuously
• Easy installation • 3.2A current limit
• High efficiency • 7.5V output
• Input voltage range 94-264V
• High efficiency
Base unit EBU-100 Base unit EBU-200

Art no: 104100.01 Art no: 104200.01
• A base unit for E-series modules

• Fits 10 modules + power supply • Base unit 6 HU 19”
• Fits 5 Multibox Pro
To view our full line of Professional E-series Products, visit our Web site at
www.a2b.se.
design for TV
Accessories
ACCESSORIES
Frontpanel Multibox Pro DC-cable for EPP-100

Art no: 705410.01 Art no: 500061.01
Frontpanel kit Multibox Pro.

Mounting in 19” base unit
Cabling for connection between power
(EBU-200).
supply EPP-100 and modules in E-
series. (approx. length 80 cm)
Audio/video cable
Art no: 500021.01
Wall mount plate

Art no: 700062.01 Cable for connecting receivers and
modulators in the E-series.
(approx. length 20 cm)
Null modem cable

Art no: 500080.01
• For E-series modules

• Easy installation of single units
Cable for connection between

EMU-100 and modules in the E-series.
(approx. length 20 cm)
640000.01 rev_A
A2B Electronics AB Phone +46 141 229100

P.O. Box 14 Fax +46 141 229101
SE-591 21 Motala E-mail market@a2b.se
Sweden www.a2b.se
12 – WAYS PASSIVE
COMBINER

EC0-12
INSTALLATION
GUIDE
ECO-12
12 way passive combiner
English
design for TV 1
Contents
1. Introduction
2. Unpacking the unit
3. Installation
4. Technical specification
English
1. Introduction
Thank you for choosing this quality product from A2B Electronics. We have
made every effort to ensure that you as a customer are satisfied with the
performance and features of this product for years to come.
The ECO-12 is a product that combines the signals from up to 12 EVA

modulators together and feed those signals to one output. This gives you a nice
installation, easy to overlook.
The ECO-12 is made for 19 inch mounting so that you can install it together with
our 19 inch rack base units (EBU-100 and EBU-200).
This guide describes the installation of the unit.
For further assistance, contact your local dealer or A2B technical support at:
A2B Electronics AB
Phone: +46 (0)141 229115
E-mail: support@a2b.se
You can also visit our website www.a2b.se for further support.
English
2. Unpacking the unit
ECO-12 is delivered with two connection cables.
The following items are included in the package:
Amount Description
1 ECO-12, 12 way passive combiner
2 Connection cables
1 This Installation guide in printed version
Every unit is quality inspected by us before delivery. Should any items

be missing when unpacking, please contact our support service (see
page 3 for address).
English
3. Installation
The ECO-12 has 12 inputs which allows you to combine up to 12 signals

within 5 to 1000MHz. The two cables that’s included has to be connected to
get the signals from the inputs to the output. Connect one of the cables from
“A” to “A” and the other one from “B” to “B” ( marked EXTERNAL).
Connect your signals (EVA modulator outputs) to IN1, IN2, IN3 etc. Connect
out to your measurement instrument and make sure that the combined signals
are at the same level. Connect the output (OUT) to your CATV or SMATV
network.
NOTE! It is very important that non used inputs are terminated with 75 ohm.
English
4. Technical specification
ECO-12
12 way passive combiner
Connectors Return loss
Input connectors F connector female 5-40 MHz > 20,0 dB
Output connectors F connector female 40-860 MHz > 18,0 dB
Impedance 75 ohm 860-1000 MHz > 18,0 dB
Number of inputs 12
Insertion loss (in-out) Miscellaneous
5-40 MHz < 13,0 dB Dimensions 425 x 125 x 40 mm

housing (exclusive front)
40-470 MHz < 13,6 dB
Size 19” 1 HU
470-750 MHz < 14,1 dB
Weight Approx. 1.4 kg
750-860 MHz < 14,5 dB
Power pass No
860-1000MHz < 15,0 dB
Shielding efficiency > 110,0 dB
Temperature range 0 to +45˚C

Isolation
5-750 MHz > 25,0 dB
750-860 MHz > 24,0 dB
860-1000 MHz > 22,0 dB
6
This specification may be subject to change without prior notice.
English
Notes
_________________________________________
_________________________________________
_________________________________________
_________________________________________
_________________________________________
_________________________________________
_________________________________________
_________________________________________
_________________________________________
_________________________________________
_________________________________________
_________________________________________
_________________________________________
_________________________________________
_________________________________________
_________________________________________
_________________________________________
_________________________________________
_________________________________________
_________________________________________
English
A2B Electronics AB
Södra Allén 23-25, 591 37 Motala

P.O. Box 14, 591 21 Motala
SWEDEN
Phone +46 141 229100
Fax +46 141 229101
E-mail market@a2b.se
654400.01 rev_A
To view our full line of Professional E-series Products, visit our Web site
www.a2b.se
8
MULTI – SWITCH
TRIAX MODEL
TMS 5 x 16P
Aerials | Dishes | Receivers | Headends | Fibre optic | Multi switches | Amplifiers | Outlets | Home accessories | Fibre cabinets | Enclosures
Triax multi switches - your shortcut to the perfect solution
TRIAX - your ultimate connection

1
We’ve got multi switches for all your needs.
Now let’s help you pick the right one
This folder briefly introduces you to the scope

and range of Triax multi switches. We don’t
want to waste your time – so, to keep things
clear and quick to read, not all sub-series are
mentioned here. For detailed and technical
info, please consult our website,
or contact us. We’ll be happy to help you.
If you’ve already got a pretty good idea which

type(s) of multi switch you need to complete
your present project successfully – feel free to
skip this short intro and jump straight to your
Stand-alone Cascadable Casca
point of interest. multi switches multi switches multi s
Fixed Mod
First up – what exactly do you need a multi

switch for? From a technical point of view, it
enables many set-top box users to share a
single dish/LNB installation and cabling.
All users will enjoy a full digital signal quality
- from satellite to set-top box. And from an
aesthetical and practical point of view, multi
switches can help you avoid many dishes on
a building.
On top of that, you get these benefits

with set-top box and multi switch
solutions: Full DVD-picture quality, full
DVD/CD-sound quality, real 16:9 picture
format, high definition capability and
surround sound.
So, to cut to the bone, when should you use a

multi switch?
 Whenever more than four users have their
own individual set-top box – and need a Sate
shared dish. pos llite
ition
 When many channels are required. s/po
lariti
es
 When users live within a relatively short
distance of the dish – and each other.
2
Generally,
the number of
satellite positions and polarities – along
with user/subscriber outputs – determine
the right choice of multi switch for you.
People often ask us if it’s possible to receive

signals from more than one satellite position.
The answer is yes. Solutions exist for one to
four individual satellite positions. If you want
more than one position, please look for the
multi switch solutions that include a DiSEqC-
switch.
adable Another frequently asked question concerns

switches
dular
Subscribers the distribution of different signals. Can terres-
<
trial and cable signals be distributed via a multi

switch that already provides satellite signals?
120 Yes they can. Most of the time, both coexist on
the very same cable.
40
Let’s just conclude this short intro by letting
24 you know, that whenever you choose a Triax
product – including any of our multi switches
16
– you’re safe. If you need to expand or change
4 an installation sometime in the future, you can
almost always apply new products to existing
5x
ones – saving you both time and money. And

x
4x x 5
M 2 MM
5x
M 3-4 MM
M
4x x
/T
despite their advanced and complex technical

x
M
M 1
TM x/T
/T
4
qualities, all Triax products are designed to be

TM
TM
easy to install and use.

S C p
TM 9x 5 ta
TM M P
-T x
S S5
C /5
2x x
xC
P S5
But – in case something is giving you trouble

17
S xP TM TM
or you can’t seem to find what you’re looking

for, please call us and let us deal with it.
S 8x P
TM P 5x
TM 5x/
TM x/9
xT
S
17
9
TM
Want to know more about the dos and don’t

of perfect multi switch installations – or
look up specific terms used in this folder?
Please turn to the last couple of pages >>
TRIAX - your ultimate connection
3
Triax multi switch solutions
- few to many users
Deliver consistent
signals to all your customers
– with the TMM 4x and 5x
IFM 120
UHF 1/WB ............
UHF 2 ...................
BIII ........................
BI-II ......................
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▼
Both fully modular and cascadable, the TMM

4x and 5x series give you up to four satellite
positions with a maximum of 16 polarities. Both
are easy to install – even when you’re faced
with a building that only allows you a small or
tight working space.
This series is your preferred

choice when you want to:
• gradually adjust to changing needs
- e.g. begin with a few satellite positions or
users and add more later, without starting
your installation from scratch
• provide a consistent and powerful signal level
for all users throughout an entire building
• enjoy up to 16 satellite polarities and one
terrestrial input (terrestrial input use TMM 5x)
TMM series of multi switches are the ideal

system for providing freedom of choice to
the individual subscriber.
User and installer benefits:

• All switch functions are powered and
controlled by your set-top box
• Select 4, 6, 8, 12 and 16 outputs to easily
adjust to the exact number of users
• Includes terrestrial input and loop-through
on all subscriber outputs Find the multi switch solution
• Combines perfectly with the modular that’s right for you at:
TMM 4x and 5 x series
4
- few to many users
Triax multi switch solutions >

Easily change satellite
position
Switch between satellite positions – with
DiSEqC Bridger units for the TMM series
Need to switch between two, three or four

satellite positions using just one set-top box?
No problem. Pick the TMM 2B, 3B or 4B unit
– when you’re looking for a 2x1, 3x1 or 4x1
DiSEqC plug-and-switch solution.
TMM series of DiSEqC switches are the ideal

system for providing freedom of choice to
the individual subscriber.

• Combine any DiSEqC unit with TMM 4x or 5x
(please see above) to build a full multi
position multi switch installation
• Achieve terrestrial loop-through, using a
DiSEqC with a TMM 5x – no matter where
you place it
• Allows a differentiated access for individual
users, as the installed switch (TMM 2B, 3B, 4B)
decides how many positions are available
Triax can also provide you with all types of

outlets for your multi switch system.
5
- few to many users
Enjoy TV signals
from 9 to 16 polarities TMS 17xC example
Why restrain yourself? Get ready to build

and extend your installations with TMS 17xC
(cascadable) and 17xT (terminated, stand-
alone) multi switches. Both let you provide up
to dozens of individual users with four satellite
positions.
This series is your preferred choice

when you want to:
• seriously reduce the number of units needed
• include three or four satellite positions in
your installation right from the start
• terminate a large cascaded system that T
already uses TMS 17xC units

(install the TMS 17xT)
• cascade your installation to another floor -
or different part of the building
(use the TMS 17xC)
TMS 9xC example
TMS 17xT and TMS 17xC series comprise

versions with 6, 8, 12 or 16 subscriber outputs

controlled by your set-top box
• Select 4, 6, 8, 12 and 16 outputs to easily
adjust to the exact number of users
on all subscriber outputs
• Includes a DiSEqC switch for position
switching
6
- few users
Enjoy TV signals
from 4 to 8 polarities
When you work with TMS 9xP (stand-alone)
TMP 9xP example
or 9xC (cascadable) multi switches, you’re
guaranteed a cost efficient solution in small to
medium sized networks that receive signals
from two satellite positions.

when you want to:
• dramatically cut down the number of units
needed in your installation
TV HIFI
• keep the door open for future expansions to
your present installation (select the TMS 9xC)
TV HIFI
TRIAX DVB 60S
TRIAX DVB 60S
• choose freely between a built-in power

TV HIFI
supply (TMS 9xP) or external power supply
TRIAX DVB 60S
TV HIFI
solution (TMS 9xC)
TRIAX DVB 60S
TV HIFI
TV HIFI
TRIAX DVB 60S
TRIAX DVB 60S
TV HIFI
TV HIFI
TRIAX DVB 60S
TRIAX DVB 60S
TMS 9x, TMS 9xC and TMS 9xP series comprise


• Hands-on flexibility. Select 4, 6, 8, 12 and
6 outputs to adjust to number of users at
any given time
5 or 9 string special colour to ensure terrestrial reception without using
labeled multi cable available a set-top box – as well as satellite reception
for multi switch installations
on all subscriber outputs
• Excellent isolation specification – no matter
which type you choose
• Includes a DiSEqC switch for position
Find the multi switch solution
switching
that’s right for you at:
7
- few polarities, few users
Enjoy TV signals
from 2 polarities
Customised as a satellite-only system, TMS
2xC is a cascadable, easy to install two-polarity
multi switch. You can use this particular series
in areas with one-position, two-polarity satellite
reception – e.g. India, The Pacific, Australia etc.

when you want to:
• dramatically cut down on the number of
units needed in your installation
• keep the door open for future expansions
to your installation
TMS 2xC series comprises

versions with 4-8 subscriber outputs

controlled by your set-top box, so you
don’t need an external power supply
• Flexible – choose between 4 and
8 user outputs
• No-hassle, cost efficient multi switch
Find the multi switch solution

that’s right for you at:
8
- few users
Sometimes one satellite

is all you need…
Install the TMS 5x modular or the TMS 5xP
stand-alone multi switch, where only one satel-
lite position is required – allowing up to four
polarities. Both versions include terrestrial input
and loop-through combined to user outputs.

when you want to:
• enjoy great signal performance at a fair price
5 or 9 string special colour
labeled multi cable available • cut number of units to an absolute minimum
for multi switch installations (when you use the TMS 5xP)
• install or expand a large system using
TMS TAP components
IFM 120
UHF 1/WB ............
UHF 2 ...................
BIII ........................
BI-II ......................
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▼
TMS 5x and TMS 5xP series comprise


• You can watch terrestrial signals without
using a set-top box
• Excellent isolation specification
– no matter which type you choose
• Pick 4, 6, 8, 12 or 16 outputs in a single
installation – and easily cascade and
expand the system in the future (using
TMS TAP units)
9
- few to many users
This is how you keep

a growing number of
one or two satellite
users happy
You’re probably familiar with this dilemma.
Very often, when you want to supply a growing
number of subscribers using stand-alone multi
switches – all the different cables tend to grow Individual polarity
too. The four-polarity TMP 5x and eight-polarity attenuators on
each input
TMP 9x multi switch comes with internal ampli-
fiers that compensate for the insertion loss. On
top of that, the integrated power supply keeps
both amplifiers and the LNB powered.

when you want to:
• supply many users at once – and you want
excellent and consistent output levels for
everyone
• be able to use the very same switch, no
matter how close or far away you are from
the dish and LNB
L-M-S switches
(0-6-12 dB) for long,
medium and short
TMP 5x and 9x series comprise subscriber lines in
versions with 8-32 subscriber outputs pairs of 4

• Do pretty much as you please with 8, 12,
16, 24 and 32 outputs in every single unit
• You can watch terrestrial signals without
using a set-top box
• Adjustable outputs to compensate for long
cables and distances (24 and 32 users)
• Adjustable inputs per polarity
• Built-in switchmode power supply
10
The dos and don’ts
of perfect multi switch installations
Often, the main reason people install a multi Keep long cable runs in the trunk,
switch system is to get access to a vast not in subscriber cables
number of TV channels. If, for instance, you
live in Europe or the Middle East you can Remember, if you have long subscriber cables,
potentially enjoy some 3-4000 channels in just the cable loss itself may force you to use a very
one installation. high-level signal in the multi switch – just to
compensate.
Triax offers you a professional, all-encompassing
range of multi switches guaranteed to cover Always carefully adjust the output level
whatever need you have – ranging from large of line amplifiers
cascadable systems for up to 16 polarities and
many users to single position multi switches with Whatever you do, NEVER just set line amplifiers
just a handful of users. for maximum output. First, get your calculations
right (or let us help you). And remember – the
But common mistakes and wrong takes on more transponders you have/use, the lower
installing multi switch solutions happen level you can run into the amplifier to avoid
everywhere on a daily basis. And we’d like to intermodulation.
cut down on that. Below we’ve put together a
short list to help you and other installers avoid
See the multi switch as a combiner in
these pitfalls. So – don’t try this at home. Or
terms of terrestrial and satellite signals
anywhere else.
Don’t forget this. RF and IF signals should NOT
Don’t make compromises be distributed equally using multi switches –
at the dish/antenna since cable losses, C/N ratios and signal levels
are completely different. Only use the terrestrial
Always use a dish size as large as possible. input found in most multi switches to combine
Signal level gained here is basically free, the two signal sources JUST BEFORE the
compared to what you may need to amplify subscriber cable and subscriber outlet.
later. Go for maximum performance and signal
level and quality out of the dish and LNB.
Many subscriber outputs do not always
mean many outputs per switch
Always do symmetrical designs
To put it short, if using one single multi switch
When you do large and long-range installations,
unit forces you to run excessively long
remember the following. Keep the distribution
subscriber cables – then you should break it up
network balanced and symmetrical by starting
into more, smaller units and let the trunk take
from the rooftop dish of high buildings – and go
care of the distances.
half way down through the building. Then split
upwards and downwards from there. And don’t
Be part of the decision-making team
be surprised if you even have to split once more.
from an early stage
Always use thickest possible cable in All too often, important decisions have already
the trunk, and thinner at subscriber been made before the installer is contacted
and asked to – swiftly – install a complex multi
The only way you can minimise large signal
switch system in an entire building. We know
losses along a cable is to use a better, often
this is often the reality of things.
thicker, cable. Avoid amplifiers as far as
But for all the reasons mentioned just above, if
possible – and keep cascading amplifiers to a
you CAN influence these decisions, and thereby
minimum.
improving your chances for a successful
installation – by all means speak up. Good luck.
For more info please visit www.triax.com
11
”What we mean by…” ”What we mean by…”
– a quick list of terms – a quick list of terms
used in this folder used in this folder
Footprint Forgive us for including the following list.

– ground area covered by signal Chances are you won’t learn anything you
The shape and size of an area on Earth where one don’t already know. So, why did we write
specific transponder can be received. Footprints vary
from simple, circular shapes to highly complex outlines this list? One reason. To minimise possible
– following geographical shapes on Earth’s surface. misunderstandings.
High Band As you’ve perhaps experienced yourself, people
Frequencies from a European satellite tend to use the same words, but with slightly
transponder range between 11.7 and 12.75 GHz. different meanings – even among professionals
within the same line of work. Consequently, the
Low Band list is here to specify what WE mean when we say
Frequencies from a European satellite Quattro LNB and footprint…
transponder range between 10.7 and 11.7 GHz.
Azimuth – see (Satellite) Position
LNB – converting and amplifying high frequencies
Satellites transmit signals at high frequencies. 13 VDC – selects vertical polarity
When a band of satellite signals get reflected by a Your set-top box usually powers your LNB – and
dish they merge in a focus point where the antenna, when you select a direct current of approximately
or Low Noise Block Converter (called LNB or LNC), 13 volts to reach the LNB it automatically receives
is placed. The LNB then down-converts and vertical polarity signals only.
amplifies the signals, effectively placing them in the
useful and convenient 950-2150 MHz IF range. 18 VDC – selects horizontal polarity
Your set-top box usually powers your LNB – and
Polarity – using the same frequency twice when you select a direct current of approximately
Most satellite transponders transmit frequencies in 18 volts to reach the LNB it automatically receives
both horizontal and vertical directions. The 90 degree horizontal polarity signals only.
difference in radiation angle – called horizontal and
vertical polarity – isolates the frequencies from each 22 kHz – switches between High or Low Band
other and prevents interference. Benefit? You can Lets your set-top box tell your LNB to pick the High
use the same frequency twice – ultimately doubling Band frequency range whenever 22 kHz is present
the number of TV channels available. as switching tone/indicator – and the Low Band
In Europe, High and Low Band frequencies are used. when it isn’t. For more on this, please see DiSEqC
And since both come with horizontal and vertical below.
polarity this means that, in total, a satellite transmits
four polarities. In the United States and the Pacific, Backbone – see Trunk or Cascade
usually only two-polarity satellites are used. Cascade – a chain of multi switches
(Satellite) Position – plotting the orbit You build a cascade, when you link two or more
Also known as Azimuth, this is the geographical multi switches together in a chain – with the first
position of the satellite orbit relative to Greenwich; serving as power source for the next in line. Cables
which is designated the ‘zero position’. connecting cascaded multi switches are often called
Now, counting from zero, you can relate satellites the trunk or backbone.
to either a specific east or west position – e.g. Astra DiSEqC – lets you switch between satellite positions
19.2 degrees east or Thor 0.8-1 degrees west. The Digital Sequence Equipment Control, or simply
Transponder – transmitting electromagnetic radiation DiSEqC switch, makes it possible for you to receive
Another name for the transmitter antennas on a signals from more than one satellite position. De-
satellite. Each satellite can have more than fifty pendent on how exactly the 22 kHz tone/indicator
transponders – transmitting on individual is transmitted, this switch determines from which
frequencies. satellite position you’ll be picking up signals.
Trunk – cables in a cascade Dish – collects and focuses satellite signals

Also known as the backbone, the trunk refers to Roughly speaking, transponders on a satellite send
cables running between multi switches in a cascade. out electromagnetic radiation – which is then picked
up by a satellite dish on Earth. The signal collected
Quattro LNB – the customised multi switch solution by the dish is then reflected to a focus point where
Used exclusively with multi switches, this type of the antenna, or LNB, is placed.
LNB gives you four outputs that are fixed
individually to each of the four polarities – i.e. Low Elevation – viewing the satellite at the right angle
Band, horizontal polarity; Low Band, vertical polarity; Specifies the angle of the satellite to the horizon. At
High Band, horizontal polarity; and High Band, the Equator this gives you an elevation of 90 de-
vertical polarity. A Quattro LNB needs four cables, grees. In Central Germany it’s 32. In Denmark 26 –
one for each polarity. and in Central Sweden it’s down to 15 degrees.
13
What’s next on your agenda
… dishes, multiswitches, headends?
TRIAX
Bjørnk A/S
+45 76 ærvej 3 •
DK-87
mail: 82 22 00 83 Hor
triax@t •
riax.dk +45 75 68 nsyld
• ww 79
w.triax. 66
Triax-H com
Empfan irschm
Oberer gstechn ann Au
6830 Paspels ik GmbH stria
This Triax brochure briefly introduces you to the widest

Tel.: Ran kweil weg 6-8
Fax: +43 - Austria Triax-H
55
e-mail: +43 55 22 307 Karl-Be irschm
web: rankweil 22 307 0 72124 nz-Stras ann Mu
www.h @triax-h 394 GermanPliezha se 10 ltimedi
irschma irschma usen a Gm
Triax nn-aus nn-austr Tel.: y
TRIA
Fin bH
Malmin land tria.at ia.at Fax: +49
FIN-00 kaari 23 712 Triax
e-mail: +49 712 7 92 34 SvedenSvensk
range of amplifier solutions on the world market today.

Finland 700 Hel B info@tr 7 92 34 0
sinki web: S-582 gatan a AB
Tel: www.tr iax-hirschm 10
Swe 73 Link
9
Fax: +358 Triax-H iax-hirs ann den öpin
9 chmann .de Tel: g
e-mail: +358 34 78 470 Electron irschm
X
Fax: +46
web: triax.fi 9 34 78 Rokolya ics Kft. ann Mu
.com 13
www.tr@triax.dk 0
471 e-mail: +46 13 14 41 14
1131 u. 1-1 ltimédi web: triax.se@14 41
Mult
iax.fi a 13
HungarBudapest3 www.tr triax.dk
Triax Tel.: y
Triax
iax.se
13 rue Sárl Fax: +36
1 AbergoUK
ZAC du Che e-mail: +36 1 349 419
Lam min 329 9 Treorchyrki Indu
F - 674 perthei de Fer web: info 8453 stria
@hi United - Sou l Esta
France 51 Mun m - Ced www.h rschman
im
dolsheim ex Tel: Kingdo th Wales te
Tel: irschma n-multim
Ced Triax-H nn- edia Fax : +44 m CF42
6DL
Fax: +33 ex irschm multime .hu 14
38 N.I.F. e-mail: +44 14 43 77 89
e-mail: +33 38 81 80 909 C/ IngeB 282578 ann Mu dia.hu
edia
web: sales@t 43 77 08
web: sc@triax81 80 Pol niero 48 ltimeid riax 77 79
900 ww
But maybe your present or future project doesn’t end

www.tr .fr igon Torr a Esp w.triax. .co. uk
iax.fr 28022 o Fin de es Que ãna S.L co.u
Mad Sem vedo, . k
The Tel.: rid ana No 20 Triax
Tria
• Tria x Group Fax: +34 • Spain PO BoxMiddle
91
• Tria x Multime is among e-Mail: +34 91 74 828 United 18351 East
• Ma
x Cab
inet
dia -
Rec the lead web: hes@hi 32 961 36 Tel: Arab - Dub
TRIAX s - Pro eption, ers with rsch 47 Em ai
tection www.h man Fax: +971 irates
We manwas foun dist in irschma n.es
ufacture ded in of netwribution 2 busines nn.es e-mail: +971 887 310
4
ork equ and stor s areas: 4 887 0
The in Eur Denmark, triax@tr
with you selecting the perfect amplifier?

web: 310
Triax
Group ope ipment age of www.tr iax.ae 1
than
2400 and Europe in video,
in C
is a par China. 194 audio iax.com
emp
loyees t of Nie We serv 9 and and
data
in 37 lsen
& Nie ice our has kep
Aerials com
panies. lsen Hol customt growin
| Dis ding ers glob g ever
hes | A/S whi ally throsince. 750
Receiv
atalo
ch is ugh emp
ers | the mot 10 loye
Heade her com own com es acro
Don’t worry. We’ll be happy to guide you – step by step –

nds pany panies ss the
| Mu in an and glob
lti sw internat a gro e generat
itches wing
Your
| Am ional
Danish net of e sales
plifiers distribu of 170
com tors. mill. .
gue
| Outlet pany
ultim
s | Ho and
me acc emp
loys
essorie more
Triax
ate c
s | Fib
offer re cab
till your project has successfully reached its goal.

inets
you | Enc
onne
insig losure
ht, ex s
perie
ction nce
and
a wid
e rang
Aerials
| Dis
hes |
Receiv
e of
Triax
Your
ers |
solu Heade
tions nds
offer
| Mu
lti sw
ultim
itches
you
| Am
plifiers
insight, conn
| Outlet
osures
ate
s | Ho
TRIA
nets | Encl
Please browse through the various Triax product

Deale cabi
me acc
r: | Fibre essorie
experie ectio
ssories s | Fib
XM
Find| Home acce re cab
ets more info inets
ers | Outl
nce
| Enc
hes Main ultimed

| Amplifi rmation losure
switches on… s
and
| Multi .
llite dis
Headends
a wid
ivers |
n
es | Rece
ia
brochures to find everything that’s relevant to you –
| Dish
Cata
Aerials
Sate
e rang
rtner
d a pa
logu
e of
hes an
solu
to both
, Switc results e
GB -
tions
No Bs
Triax
s,AllAK.LN
Main
Art.
pected
Cata
– dishe sub ributors

talog
from aerials, multiswithes to dishes, headends and more.

452.1.0. 891407
ue COV
e ducex
ER 2008
th and dit
-1.in
specifi 2 • Pro
ng
dd
1
deliveri to change with this catain 2008 ers

ject cati
loguus
on in ed
en
Triax
d-
Mark
out noti e
All rights eting
•
signifies reserved.© 2005 The
ce
your Use of Triax
agree Grou
ment this mate p
to the rial
terms
of use.
Visit www.triax.com and download all the TRIAX

- your
ultim
relevant brochures.
ate co
nnec
n
tion
connectio
ultimate
- your
TRIAX
07-0
1-20
Or just call us – and we’ll send you

08
12:4
7:56
a paper version right away. Mas

t am
plifi
er
| Pr
og
ram
mab
le am
plifi
er
| Ap
artm
en
t am
plifi
er Aerials
| Ho | Dishes
Tri
use | Receivers
co | Head
nn
ectio ends |
Multi switc
ax
Aerials n am hes | Amp
Take co
| Dis plifi lifiers |
hes | er Outlets
Receiv | CA | Home
ntrol of
accessor
–y
ers | TV ies | Fibre
A
Heade ho
use cabinets
nds
ou
the tele
| Mu co
nn
| Enclosur
lti sw
mp
itches rq ectio es
uic
vision
| Am n am
plifiers plifi
| Outlet
kg
channel
er
SMA
s | Ho | Di
uid
lifi
strib
me acc – wit h pow
s
essorie utio
s | Fib
et n am
erful dig
TV H
re cab
os
plifi
and let ital rec
ers
inets er
| Enc your TV eivers
– inno
losure
s tro of cha prove
itself wit
from Tria
ng nnels wh x,
ead-
vative er ile you h hundre
so TV relax and ds
to pr lutions th
ends
well-trim enjoy the
sig med scr
esen
t and at offer na een pic
ls tures
futu qu
re ne ality an
twor d
k subs varety
criber
s
TR
IAX
- yo
ur TRIAX
ultim - your
ate ultimate
connectio
co n
nn
ec
tio
n
TRIAX
- you
r ultima
te con
nection
Aerials | Dishes | Receivers | Headends | Multi switches | Amplifiers | Outlets | Home accessories | Fibre cabinets | Enclosures
Your ultimate connection

Triax offer you insight, experience and a wide range of solutions
Find more information on….
TRIAX A/S AB.101.1.02 • Produced in 2008

Bjørnkærvej 3 • DK-8783 Hornsyld All specification in this brochure
+45 76 82 22 00 • +45 75 68 79 66 subject to change without notice
mail: triax@triax.dk • www.triax.com Triax Marketing • © 2008 The Triax Group
All rights reserved. Use of this material
signifies your agreement to the terms of use.
12
TV AMPLIFIER
NAVAL MODEL
A 3540
TV-amplifier A3540
A3540 broadband TV-amplifier covers all interna-
tional VHF and UHF TV-frequencies. It is intended
for use in shipborne CAS-systems and is well
suited for distribution of digitally modulated sign-
als. A separate S-band input is provided for distri-
bution of e.g. satellite signals.
Two separate automatic level control circuits
(ALC) help maintain the output level stable under
the varying conditions often encountered aboard
ships.
A push-pull hybrid amplifier in the final stage
keeps intermodulation to a minimum.
Gain/Frequency range
VHF 170-230 MHz 37 ± 2 dB
S 244-446 MHz 32 ± 2 dB
UHF 470-890 MHz 40-44 ± 2 dB*
Gain flatness <1 dB within any ch.
Manual attenuation 0-20 dB
ALC
Max. output level VHF 118 ± 2 dBμV (1 sign.)
Max. output level UHF 123 ± 2 dBμV (1 sign.)
Range VHF >40 dB
Range UHF >30 dB
3rd order intermodulation

VHF/UHF <60 dBc (ALC limited)
S; 26 ch, 108 dBμV <60 dBc
Return loss >20 dB**
Noise figure <6 dB

Impedance 75 Ω
Supply voltage 24 V ± 10%

Current consumption 330 mA ± 10%
EMC EN60945:2002,
EN50083-2
Operational temp. range -40 to 40°C
* 4 dB positive tilt Size: (H) 210 x (W) 41X (D) 96 mm
** At 40 MHz –1.5 dB/octave
0605
Tel. +46(0)40-29 20 45. Fax +46(0)40-18 74 13
TV-amplifier A 3540
Schematic diagram for A3540
C3
2 R54 R55 R56 R57
R11
R12 R5 R18 D8 C48 C47

1
R10 U1
R58
U1
U1 U1
C35 U5
R13 R6 R9 R17
R16
R7 330u
820
C33 C34 C20A C20
R8 C4 R2 R1 C49 8p2
R14 R15 R4 R3
C42 C55
D6 15n
D5 L23
R47 R48 R94

R49
R95
U11 R86
D13
C24 L17 D10 L18 R96
R97
C26 C27 D21
R51 L20 L19 U11 R91 R87 D15

R50
D12 D11
U10
L21
C41 C43 D22
U11
U11 R85 D17

C5
4 R59 R60 R61 R62
R36 D9
3 R29 C51
R28
U2 R63
R30 R23 U2 C52
U2 U2 U7
R31 C38
R24 R27 R35
R34
R25 330u
10n
C37 C40 C21A C21
R26 C6 R20 R19 10n
R32 R33 R22 R21 C54
C23 C74
D2
D1
R37 R38
R39 R99 U13
R100
R88 D14
C15 L13 D3 L14
R102
10n 10n R101 U13 D23

C17 C18
R41 L11 L15 R40 R98 R89 D16

D7 D4
U12
L12
C28 10n C31 10n U13 D24
U13
Connector power supply R90 D18
U15
R93
C82
D20
100n
R103 C81 C83 C39 C75
C30 C32 C46 C57 C53
R104 L50 L48
L49 200u
C86 R106-108 C93
U14
D26
C92 C87 C80

R92
R105 R109
L47
D25 D19
C85
C78 C79 R73 R72
RV3 R70 L27 2u2 C59 L30 C63 L36
R69 C56 L28 C69

R71 L29
U9
C60 L31 C64
C61
R53 R52 R75 R74 4p7
120 C84
2u2 2u2
C9 C11 C12 RV2 L22 C44 R68 C45 L26 C65 C66 C67 C68 L46 C89 C88
100 R77100 12p
U16
C25 C29 R66 C58 R76 R78 R79 L43
R67
U4 U8 680R 2p2
4n7 L32 C62
L6 L9 4n7 L33 L34 L35 C91 C90 L45 L44
3p3
Printed on
pcb board R80 0 C77 L42
L41
R42 R43 R64 R65
-5 dB C76
2u2 2u2
L5 C13 L8 RV1 L16 R45 C36 L25 R81 C70 L37 L38 L39 L40
L10 47
C8 L7 C16 C19 C22 R44 R46 C50 R82 R83 R84

C10 C14 5p6
U3 U6 820R 270 270
C71 C72 C73
150n 68n
L4 L3 L2 L1
22p
C7 C2 C1
Description Order No. Weight: 0.55 kg

A3540 201.800 Standard package: 1
AM – FM – BI AMPLIFIER
NAVAL MODEL
A 3560
AM-FM-BI amplifier A3560
A3560 radio-amplifier covers the AM and FM

bands as well as TV-band I. It is intended for use
in shipborne CAS-systems and is well suited for
distribution of digitally modulated signals.
Two separate automatic level control circuits
(ALC) help maintain the output level stable under
the varying conditions often encountered aboard
ships.
Gain/Frequency range
AM 0.1-26.5 MHz 30 ± 2 dB
Band I 40-70 MHz (Europe) 32 ± 2 dB
FM 88-110 MHz 34 ± 2 dB
Manual attenuation 0-20 dB
ALC
Max. output level BI 118 ± 2 dBμV (1 sign.)
Max. output level FM 118 ± 2 dBμV (1 sign.)
Range BI >50 dB
Range FM >45 dB
3rd order intermodulation
Band I/FM <60 dBc (ALC limited)
AM, 2 sign.118 dBμV <60 dBc
Return loss
AM/FM >16 dB
Band I >18 dB
Noise figure <6 dB

Impedance 75 Ω
Supply voltage 24 V ± 10%

Current consumption 210 mA ± 10%
EMC EN60945:2002,
EN50083-2
Operational temp. range -40 to 40°C
Size: (H) 210 x (W) 41X (D) 96 mm

0611
Tel. +46(0)40-29 20 45. Fax +46(0)40-18 74 13
AM-FM-BI amplifier A3560
Schematic diagram for A3560 C8
TP2 R49 R50 R51 R52
R11
R12 R5 TP1 R18 D11 C50 C49

R10 C30 C22A
U1
R13 R6 R9 R65
U1
C31 C22
U1 U1 U5
R17
R16
R7 330u
C41
R8 C7 R2 R1
R4 R3 C51
R14 R15 C44 C63
D6
D5 R99
R42 R43 D13
R44 R100
L19 U14 R91

L20
C26 D8
R102
R101 D15
U14 D21
C37 C38
L22 L21 R45 R98 R92
R46
D10 D9
L23 U13
D22
U14
C43 C45
D17
U14
R90
C9
TP4 R58 R59 R60 R61
R29
R23
R30 R36 D12 C53 C52
TP3
R28 U2
R31 R24 R27 R66
U2
U2 U2
U7
R35
R25 R34
330u
C42
C33 C34 C23A C23
R26 C10 R20 R19
R32 R33 R22 R21 C55
C25 C77
D2
D1
R38 D14
R37 R104
R39 R105
L15 U16 R94

C17 L14 D3
R107
D16
R106
C19 C20 R40 U16 D23
R41 L13 L16 R103 R95

D7 D4
L17
U15
C27 C28 D24
U16
D18
U16
R93
L47 L43 U18

L46 C87 C78 C35 R97
Connector power supply C89 R116
C86 C85
D26
R108
C83 100n
SO8
C88
D20
C90 100n
C81
C29 C40 C48 C54 C59
R109 330u
35V
C84 R111-R115
U17
5x 100n
R96
R110 L42 330u
D25 D19
100n 35V
C82
C79 C80
R53 R54 R67 R68 R83

R85
U3 L18 R56 U6 L25 R86 U12 L30 R84

C1 C3 C4 L3 L4 RV1 C24 C56 C62 C75 C76 C73
100n 2u2 2u2 2u2
R87
C18 C21 C32 C74

1k
L1 L2 C5 C6 R55 R57 R88 R89 L40 L41 L39
Filtret modifierat till ny ALC R47 R48 R71 R72 R76

R78
C2 L9 C15 L11 RV2 U4 R64 U9 -7 dB U11 R77

L24 C46 L26 C60 C61 L29 L32 C70 L36 C72
2u2 2u2 R81 2u2 100n
100n R79 56
C36 C39 C47 C66

1k2 180 180
C14 L10 C16 L12 R62 R63 R80 R82 L31 C65 L35 C69
R69 R70 R73

68 68 R75
L27 L28 R74
L44 L45
L5 L6 L7 L8 RV3 U8 2u2 U10 2u2 L33 L34 L37 L38
C57 C58 C64
C11 C12 C13 C67 C68 C71
Description Order No. Weight: 0.55 kg

A3560 201.825 Standard package: 1
OUT PUT FILTER
NAVAL MODEL
OF 3581
Out put filter OF3581
IN
OF 3581 is a low-loss transformer-coupled
four-way splitter for use in cassette
amplifier systems.
TEST
It is mounted in a solid, high frequency -20dB
shielded case. It is important to note that all

outlets not used must be terminated with
75 Ohms resistors.
OUTPUTS
-8 dB
Frequency Range: 0.1-890 MHz -8 dB
Input/Output impedance: 75 Ohm
Operation temp.range: -40 - +60oC
Manual gain adjustment: 0 - 20 dB
Splitter loss: 8 dB (typ)
Return loss: 20-14 dB -8 dB
Return loss 17 dB at 40 MHz: -1.5 dB/octave
Weight: 0.4 kg
Connectors: 75 Ohm BNC female (6x)
-8 dB
Size: (H) 210 x (W) 41X (D) 96 mm

0603
Tel. +46(0)40-29 20 45. Fax +46(0)40-18 74 13
Out put filter OF3581
Schematic
J3
TR5 TR6
R11 -8 dB
J1 C3 alt. -11dB
R2 J4
INPUT
R1 R3 R5
TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4
R4 R10
C1 C2
R6
R9
J2
R8 J5
TEST
-2 0 dB
TR7 TR8
alt. -3dB R7
R12 -8 dB
C4 alt. -11dB
J6
Component list OF3581

REF. NAVAL NO.
R2 0 ohm 0805 SMD 116.999 J1 BNC female 141.010
R5 0 ohm J2 BNC female
R6 330 ohm SMD 116.061 J3 BNC female
R12 150 ohm
Specifications stated are subject to change
C2 1 pF 0805 SMD 125.007 without notice.
C3 1 pF
C4 1 pF
TR3 TR 2-5 132.033

TR4 TR 2-2 132.032
TR5 TR 2-5
TR6 TR 2-2
TR7 TR 2-5
TR8 TR 2-2
Connector power supply
Description Order No. Shipping weight: 0.48 kg

OF3581 201.840 Standard package: 1
Volume: 1.0 cdm
POWER SUPPLY
NAVAL MODEL
PS 3522
Power supply PS3522
The power supply PS3522 is designed to supply the

Naval cassette amplifier system with 24 V DC, and any of
the Naval active antennas type Mark 20CA, 22CA,
30ALC, 32ALC and VPA 30 with 15 V DC. It has a wide
input voltage range for world wide use and
remote cut-out function.
Input voltage: 100-250 V AC 50-60 Hz
Output voltage: 24 V DC ± 5%
Max output current: 1.5 A
Output voltage to antenna: 15 V DC ± 5%

Max output current to antenna: 500 mA
Max ripple: 25 mVRMS
Input/Output impedance: 75 Ohm

Operation temp.range: -40 - +60oC
Weight: 850 g
EMC: EN 50083-2,EN 60945
LVD: EN 60065 Size: (H) 210 x (W) 82 x (D) 96 mm

0510
Tel. +46(0)40-29 20 45. Fax +46(0)40-18 74 13
Power supply PS3522
Schematic diagram for PS3522
REMOTE CUT OUT
Alt.1) 24 V DC between + and - terminals.
Alt.2) Jumper between GND and - terminals.

Connection of PS3522
NOTE! Only one alternative at the time.
Top gable
Bottom gable
Locking device
Power inlet
100-250 V AC 50/60 Hz
Description Order No. Shippingweight: 1.0 kg

PS3522 201.348 Standard package: 1
POWER SUPPLY AND AMPLIFIER
NAVAL MODEL
PSA – 350
Line amplifier PSA 350-1/2
The PSA 350-1/2 line amplifier is designed to Like other Naval products, the PSA 350
amplify radio and TV signals for distribution series are designed to meet the special
in a medium-sized network. PSA 350-1/2 with requirements of world-wide marine use.
an additional RA-18 plug in module can also See overleaf for further details of specific
be used for interactive systems. The power applications.
supply accepts 117 and 230 VAC.
Size: (H) 165 mm x (W) 230 mm x (D) 85 mm

General Output level at 129 NTSC chs (102 dBµV)
Operation temperature range: -40 – +55C° CSO: -55 dBOutput level
Indoor use only. CTB: -50 dB
Humidity: <95% non condensing XMOD: -57 dB
EMC: EN 50083-2 Attenuation 0.1–30 MHz: 0–13 dB
Safety: EN 60065 Attenuation 40–890 MHz: 0–18 dB
Weight: 2.6 kg Tilt adjustment 40–890 MHz: 0–18 dB
Electrical Return Loss: 20 dB at 40 MHz (-1.5 dB/octave)
Input voltage: 117/230 V AC +10/-15%, 50–60 Hz Current consumption: 400 mA
Input/Output impedance: 75 ohm Attenuation 0.1–30 MHz: 0–13 dB
Connectors: 5/8–24 (F-adapters optional) Attenuation 40–890 MHz: 0–18 dB
Frequency range: 0.1–30, and 40–890 MHz Tilt adjustment 40–890 MHz: 0–18 dB
Gain 40–890 MHz: Operating gain: Min. 30 dB
Full gain: 34 dB RETURN/INTERACTIVE UNIT RA-15
Gain 0.1–26.5 MHz: Min. 15 dB
Frequency range: 5–25 MHz
Noise figure: Max. 7 dB
Gain:* 15.5 dB*
Output level, 2 sign 60 dB IMA: Max. 120 dBµV
Attenuation: 0–13 dB
Flatness: ±0.5 dB
Fixed slope: 6±1 dB
Output level (for reference): 105 dBµV 4chs
Noise figure: 8 dB nor.
Return loss: 15 dB
0710
* 0 dB (RB-0A) return bridge 5-25 MHz can be supplied on special request
Tel. +46(0)40-29 20 45. Fax +46(0)40-18 74 13
All specifications stated are subject to change without notice. E-mail: sales@naval.se Web:www.naval.se 5004
Line amplifier PSA 350-1/2
Examples of possible PSA 350 configurations 350 amplifier works well as a line amplifier with the
The PSA 350 amplifier features low noise and is AM plug in unit,or as a subamplifier in larger installa-
designed to operate in difficult conditions at sea, tions equipped with the CAS 3500 main system. The
with wide variations in the input signal. The PSA PSA 350 can also be used in an interactive system
eg. Pay TV, videogames a.s.o
GAIN THERMAL AMP

CONTROL EQ AMP COMPENSATOR (HYBRID)
MA-18 MS-86/18
ATT TEST POINT

TEST -20dB
POINT
-20dB
INPUT OUTPUT LINE OUT

LINE IN MODULE H H MODULE
L L
TO-*/0A TO-*/0A
AM PLUG IN MODULE (-1), AM-20
OR
INTERACTIVE PLUG IN MODULE (-2), RA-18
OPTIONAL
LINE B
(ORDER NO: SEE BELOW)
POWER SUPPLY
230/117 VAC
(DOUBLE ISOLATED)
Power supply is approved for class II operation

but is equipped with grounded cable as standard
Use as line amplifier

The PSA 350 is also well suited as sub-amplifier in larger
systems or as an interactive unit e.g for Pay TV a.s.o.
In connection with main CAS amplifiers.
Description Order No. Type

PSA 350-1 201.171 AM-FM-TV Line amplifier
PSA 350-2 201.172 FM-TV Line amplifier incl. interactive unit eg. RA-18B
PSA 350-3 201.173 FM-TV Line amplifier incl. return bridge eg. RB-0A
Shippingweight: 2.9 kg Standard package: 1, Volume: 4 dm3
SWITCH MODE POWER SUPPLY
DHECN MODEL
SKS-50-24
SKS-50 Single Output Switching Power Supply
Features:
High efficiency, high reliability, low cost
AC input range selected by switch
Protections: Short circuit/ Over load
Cooling by free air convection
LED indicator for power on
Fixed switching frequency at 27KHz
1 year warranty
Dimensions: 159*97*38mm(L*W*H)
MODEL SKS-50-5 SKS-50-12 SKS-50-15 SKS-50-24 SKS-50-48
DC VOLTAGE 5V 12V 15V 24V 48V

VOLTAGE TOLERANCE ±2% ±1% ±1% ±1% ±1%
RATED CURRENT 10A 4.2A 3.4A 2.1A 1A
CURRENT RANGE 0-10A 0-4.2A 0-3.4A 0-2.1A 0-1A
OUTPUT
RATED POWER 50W 50.4W 51W 50.4W 48W
RIPPLE & NOISE 75mVp-p 100mVp-p 100mVp-p 100mVp-p 100mVp-p
DC ADJUSTMENT RANGE -5%,+10% ±10% ±10% ±10% ±10%
SETUP, RISE, HOLD TIME 200ms,100ms,20ms at full load
VOLTAGE RANGE 85～132 VAC/170～264VAC 47～63 Hz；选择 240～370VDC
AC CURRENT 1.3A/115 V 0.65A/ 230 V
INPUT EFFICIENCY 71% 78% 78% 82% 84%
INRUSH CURRENT Cold start18A/115V 36A/230V
LEAKAGE ＜1 mA/240VAC
110%～160%
PROTECTION OVER LOAD Protection type: Shut down o/p voltage, recovers automatically after faultlt
condition is removed
WORKING TEMP., HUMIDITY -10℃～+60℃；20%～90 %RH
ENVIRONMENT STORAGE TEMP., HUMIDITY -20℃～+85℃；10%～95 %RH
VIBRATION 10～500Hz，2G 10min./1cycle，period for 60min, each along X, Y, Z axes
WITHSTAND VOLTAGE I/P-O/P：1.5KVAC I/P-FG：1.5KVAC O/P-FG：0.5KVAC

SAFETY
ISOLATION RESISTANCE I/P-O/P, I/P-FG, O/P-FG: 100M Ohms/500VDC
SAFETY STANDARD Design refer to UL1012

STANDARD
EMC STANDARD Design refer to FCC Part15 J Conduction Class B
WEIGHT 0.51Kg
OTHERS
PACKING 24pcs/13.1Kg/0.7CUFT
1. All parameters NOT specially mentioned are measured at 230VAC input, rated load and 25℃ of ambient
temperature.
NOTE 2. Ripple & noise are measured at 20MHz of bandwidth by using a 12″twisted pair-wire terminated with a 0.1μ
& 47μ parallel capacitor.
3. Tolerance: includes set up tolerance, line regulation and load regulation.
POWER PASS SPLITTER
PACIFIC STELLITE MODEL

4202AP
PACIFIC POWER PASS SPLITTER
* All ports with Power Pass
* Frequency : 5-2400MHz
* Impedance : 75 ohms all ports
* Power pass : Max. 1A, 3.0V
* Grounding Terminal Provided
* RF Shielded Zinc Die Cast Housing, Nickel-Plated
Item Insertion Loss (dB) Mutual Isolation (dB) Return Loss (dB)
(MHz) 5- 40 - 1000 - 2050 - 5- 40 - 1000 - 2050 - 5- 40 - 1000 - 2050 -
Model 40 1000 2050 2400 40 1000 2050 2400 40 1000 2050 2400
4202AP 4.0 4.5 5.8 6.5 14.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 12.0 15.0 14.0 12.0
4203AP 7.0 8.0 10.0 11.0 22.0 22.0 20.0 20.0 10.0 12.0 12.0 12.0
4204AP 8.0 8.5 11.0 11.8 23.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 10.0 12.0 12.0 12.0
4206AP 11.0 11.5 14.0 16.5 24.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 10.0 14.0 12.0 12.0
4208AP 12.0 12.5 16.0 18.0 25.0 24.0 22.0 22.0 10.0 12.0 12.0 12.0
DVD PLAYER
SAMSUNG MODEL
DVD-E350
DVD-E370
DVD-E365
DVD-E360K
DVD-E360
DVD-E350
DVD Player
User Manual
imagine the possibilities

Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
To receive more complete service, please register your product at
www.samsung.com/register
ENGLISH
Precautions Table of contens
1. Setting up Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Folder Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
the player may not operate correctly. If this
occurs, leave the player at room tempera- Setup MP3/WMA/CD Audio Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . 8
- Refer to the identification label located on
ture until the inside of the player becomes General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 MPEG4 Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
the rear of your player for its proper operat
ing voltage. dry and operational. Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Playing Media Files using the USB HOST
- Install your player in a cabinet with Tour of the Remote Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 feature (Only DVD-E370, E360K, E360) . . . . . . 9
4. Disc Connections CD Ripping
adequate ventilation holes. (7~10cm). Do
not block ventilation holes on any of the - Do not clean disc using record-cleaning Choosing a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 (Only DVD-E370, E360K, E360) . . . . . . . . . . . 10
components for air circulation. sprays, benzene, thinner, or other volatile Basic Functions Picture CD Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
- Do not push the disc tray in by hand. solvents that may cause damage to the Playing a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Karaoke Functions
- Do not stack components. disc surface.
Using the Search and Skip Functions . . . . . . . 6 (Only DVD-E360K)
- Be sure to turn all components off before - Do not touch the disc’s bottom. Hold by the
Using the Display Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Karaoke Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
moving the player. edges or by one edge and the hole in the
center. Using the Disc and Title Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Changing Setup Menu
- Before connecting other components to
this player, be sure to turn them off. - Wipe the dirt away gently; never wipe a Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Using the Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
- Be sure to remove the disc and turn off the cloth back and forth over the disc. Slow Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Setting Up the Display Options. . . . . . . . . . . 11
player after use, especially if you are not Advanced Functions Setting Up the Audio Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
going to use it for a long time. 5. Environmental info Setting Up the System Options . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Adjusting the Aspect Ratio (EZ View). . . . . . . . 7
- The mains plug is used as a disconnect - The battery used in this product contains Selecting the Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Setting Up the Language Features. . . . . . . . . 12
device and shall stay readily operable at chemicals that are harmful to the environment. Selecting the Subtitle Language. . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Setting Up the Security Options. . . . . . . . . . . 12
any time. - So, dispose the batteries in the proper- Setting Up the General Options. . . . . . . . . . . 13
Changing the Camera Angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
manner, according to federal, state, and
2. For your safety Using the Bookmark Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Setting Up the Support Options. . . . . . . . . . . 13
local regulations.
Using the Zoom Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Reference
- This product utilizes a laser. Use of
controls or adjustments or performance of The product unit accomparied this user manual is Clips Menu for MP3/WMA/JPEG/MPEG4/ Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
procedures other than those specified licenced under certain intellectual property rights CD Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
of certain third parties. This licence is limited to
Setup
herein may result in hazardous radiation
exposure. private non-commercial use by end-user consum-
- Do not open covers and do not repair your ers for licenced contents. No rights are granted
self. Refer servicing to qualified personal. for commercial use. The licence does not cover General Features
any product unit other than this product unit and
3. Caution the licence does not extend to any unlicenced Excellent Sound Progressive Scan
product unit or pro-cess conforming to ISO/OUR Dolby Digital, a technology developed by Dolby Progressive scanning creates an improved
- Your player is not intended for industrial
11172-3 or ISO/OUR 13818-3 used or sold in Laboratories, provides crystal clear sound picture with double the scan lines of a conven-
use but for domestic purposes. Use of this
combination with this product unit. The licence reproduction. tional inter-laced picture
product is for personal use only. EZ VIEW (DVD)
only covers the use of this product unit to encode Screen
- Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping Both regular and widescreen(16:9) pictures can Easy View enables picture adjustment to match
or splashing and no objects filled with and/or decode audio files conforming to the ISO/
be viewed. your TV’s screen size (16:9 or 4:3).
liquids, such as vases, shall be placed OUR 11172-3 or ISO/OUR 13818-3. No rights are
Slow Motion Digital Photo Viewer (JPEG)
on the apparatus. granted under this licence for product features
An important scene can be viewed in slow You can view Digital Photos on your TV.
- Exterior influences such as lightning and or functions that do not conform to the ISO/OUR
motion. Repeat
static electricity can affect normal 11172-3 or ISO/OUR 13818-3. You can repeat a song or movie simply by
Parental Control (DVD)
operation of this player. If this occurs, turn The parental control allows users to set the press-ing the REPEAT button
theplayer off and on again with the POWER CAUTION: USE OF ANY CONTROLS, neces-sary level to prohibit children from view- MP3/WMA
button, or disconnect and then reconnect ADJUSTMENTS, OR PROCEDURES OTHER ing harmful movies such as those with violence, This unit can play discs contain MP3/WMA
the AC power cord to the AC power outlet. THAN SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN adult subject matter, etc. files.
The player will operate normally. HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE Various On-Screen Menu Functions MPEG4
- When condensation forms inside the player You can select various languages (Audio/ This unit can play MPEG4 formats within an
due to sharp changes in temperature, Subtitle) and screen angles while enjoying avi file.
movies. CD Ripping
2
(Only DVD-E370, E360K, E360) other than those specified herein may result in format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of movies. To obtain your registration code, locate
This feature lets you to copy audio files from hazardous radiation exposure. Rovi Corporation. the DivX VOD section in your device setup
disc to USB device into MP3 format. (Only CAUTION : This is an official DivX Certified® device that menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information
Audio CD (CD DA)). plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more on how to complete your registration.
CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER information and software tools to convert your “DivX Certified to play DivX video, including
Note
RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID EXPOSURE TO files into DivX video. premium content.”
- Discs which cannot be played with this
THE BEAM (IEC 60825-1). ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND : This DivX Covered by one or more of the following U.S
player.
• DVD-ROM • DVD-RAM THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER. USE Certified® device must be registered in order to patents : 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710;
• CD-ROM • CDV OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) 7,519,274.
• CDI • CVD PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER
- Ability to play back may depend on recording THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT
conditions. IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE. DO
• DVD-R, +R NOT OPEN COVER AND DO NOT REPAIR Description
• CD-RW YOURSELF. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
• DVD+RW, -RW (V mode) PERSONNEL. Front Panel Controls
- The unit may not play certain CD-R, CD-RW 7
and DVD-R due to the disc type or recording CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT DVD-E360K
KLASSE 1 LASER PRODUKT
conditions. LUOKAN 1 LASER LAITE ▼
▼ ▼ ▼ ▼ ▼ ▼
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
COPY PROTECTION PRODUCTO LÁSER CLASE 1
Many DVD discs are encoded with copy pro-

tection. Because of this, you should only con- Disc Markings
nect your DVD player directly to your TV, not to DVD-E370
a VCR. Connecting to a VCR results in a dis- ~ Play Region Number DVD-E360
torted picture from copy-protected DVD discs. ▼
▼ ▼ ▼ ▼ ▼
This item incorporates copy protection technol- PAL broadcast system in U.K,
PAL
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other France, Germany, etc.
intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation.
Reverse engineering and disassembly are Dolby Digital disc
prohibited.
STEREO DVD-E350
STEREO Stereo disc
PROGRESSIVE SCAN OUTPUTS DVD-E365
(576p) DIGITAL
▼ ▼ ▼ ▼ ▼
SOUND
Digital Audio disc
“CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT
ALL HIGH DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS
MP3 disc
ARE FULLY COMPATIBLE WITH THIS
PRODUCT AND MAY CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO
BE DISPLAYED IN THE PICTURE, IN CASE Region Number 1. DISC TRAY 6. USB HOST (Only DVD-E370,
OF 576 PROGRESSIVE SCAN PICTURE Both the DVD player and the discs are coded by Place the disc here. E360K, E360)
PROBLEMS, IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE region. These regional codes must match in order 2. DISPLAY Connect digital still camera, MP3 player,
USER SWITCH THE CONNECTION TO THE for the disc to play. If the codes does not match, Operation indicators are displayed here. memory stick, Card reader other remov-
‘STANDARD DEFINITION’ OUTPUT. IF THERE the disc will not play. 3. OPEN/CLOSE ( ) able storage devices.
ARE QUESTIONS REGARDING YOUR TV SET
COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL 576p DVD The Region Number for this player is described Press to open and close the disc tray. 7. MIC
PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT SAMSUNG’S on the rear panel of the player. 4. PLAY/PAUSE ( ) (Only DVD-E360K)
CUSTOMER SERVICE CENTER.” Play or pause the disc. Connect Microphone for karaoke func-
DivX Certification
5. POWER ON/OFF ( ) tions.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT DivX®, DivX Certified® and Turn on/off and the player is turned on/
associated logos are trade- off.
This Compact Disc player is classified as a
marks of Rovi Coorporation or its subsidiaries
CLASS 1 LASER product. Use of controls,
and are used under license.
adjustments or performance of procedures
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO : DivX® is a digital video
3
Tour of the Remote Control Connections
DVD-E360K DVD-E360/DVD-E370 DVD-E365/DVD-E350
Choosing a Connection
The following shows examples of connections commonly used to connect the DVD player with a TV
and other components.
1 12 1 12 1 12 Before Connecting the DVD Player
2 13 2 13 2 13
3 14
- Always turn off the DVD player, TV, and other components before you connect or disconnect
3 14 3 23
4 15 22 15 22 15 any cables.
5
6 16
5
16
5
16
- Refer to the user’s manual of the additional components you are connecting for more informa
6 6
7 7 7 tion on those particular components.
17
8 18 8
17
8
17 A. Connecting to a TV (For Video)
18 18
9
9 9 1. Using video/audio cables, connect the VIDEO (yellow)/AUDIO (red and white) OUT terminals
10 19 10 19 10 19 on the rear of the DVD player to the VIDEO (yellow)/AUDIO (red and white) IN terminals of TV.
20
11 21 11 21 11 21
2. Turn on the DVD player and TV.
3. Press the input selector on your TV remote control until the Video signal from the DVD player
appears on the TV screen.
Note
- Noise may be generated if the audio cable is too close to the power cable.
- If you want to connect to an Amplifier, please refer to the Amplifier connection page.
- The number and position of terminals can vary depending on your TV set. Please refer to the user’s
1. DVD POWER Button 13. VIDEO SEL. Button manual of the TV.
Turns the power on or off. Changes video output mode.
2. REPEAT Button - If there is one audio input terminal on the TV, connect it to the [AUDIO OUT][left] (white) terminal of
14. USB Button
Allows you to repeat play a title, chapter, the DVD player.
(Only DVD-E370,E360K,E360)
track, or disc. To change device which access to USB - If you press the VIDEO SEL. button when DVD Player is in stop mode or no disc is inserted, the Video
3. DISC MENU Button device. Output mode changes in the following sequence: (I-SCAN ➝ P-SCAN)
Brings up the Disc menu. 15. MARKER Button
4. RECORD Button 16. PLAY Button ( ) B. Connection to a TV (Interlace/Progressive)
(Only DVD-E360K) Begins disc play. 1. Using component video cables, connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminal on the rear of
Use to Karaoke recording. 17. SUBTITLE/(π) Button the DVD player to the COMPONENT IN terminal of TV.
5. SEARCH Buttons ( / ) 18. RETURN Button
Allows you to search forward/backward 2. Using the audio cables, connect the AUDIO (red and white) OUT terminals on the rear of the
Returns to a previous menu
through a disc. DVD player to the AUDIO (red and white) IN terminals of TV. Turn on the DVD player and TV.
19. TITLE MENU Button (®)
6. STOP Button ( ) Brings up the Title menu. 3. Press the input selector on your TV remote control until the Component signal from the DVD
To stop the disc 20. KARAOKE (†) Button player appears on the TV screen.
7. SKIP Buttons ( / ) (Only DVD-E360K) 4. Set the Video Output to I-SCAN/P-SCAN in the Display Setup menu. You can use the VIDEO
Use to skip the title, chapter or track. To acces karaoke menu (keycon, mic volume, SEL. button to change the Video Output mode.
8. MENU Button echo).
Brings up the DVD player’s menu. 21. INFO Button Note
9. ENTER/π/†,√/® Buttons Used to displays playback info banner. - What is “Progressive Scan”?
This button functions as a toggle switch. 22. REPEAT A-B Button Progressive scan has twice as many scanning lines as the interlace output method has. Progressive
10. AUDIO Button (√) (Only DVD-E370, E365, E360,
Use this button to access various audio scanning method can provide better and clearer picture quality.
E350)
functions on a disc. Allows you to repeat A-B disc. C. Connection to an Audio System (2 Channel Amplifier, Dolby Digital,
11. TOOLS Button 23. ZOOM Button or MPEG2 )
Displays the current disc mode. It also lets (Only DVD-E365, E350)
you access the Display function. 1. Using the audio cables, connect the AUDIO (red and white) OUT terminals on the rear of the
Enlarges the DVD Picture.
12. OPEN/CLOSE ( ) Button DVD player to the AUDIO (red and white) IN terminals of the Amplifier. If using a coaxial cable,
To open and close the disc tray.
4
connect the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL) terminal on the rear of the DVD player to the DVD-E360K
DIGITAL AUDIO IN (COAXIAL) terminal of the Amplifier. DVD-E360
2. Using the video signal cable(s), connect the VIDEO, COMPONENT OUT terminals on the rear of DVD-E350
2-Channel stereo amplifier or Dolby digital
red white
the DVD player to the VIDEO, COMPONENT IN terminals of your TV blanco
3. Turn on the DVD player, TV, and Amplifier. coaxial cable ◄ C audio cable
cable de audio
4. Press the input select button of the Amplifier to select external input in order to hear sound
from the DVD player. Refer to your Amplifier's user manual to set the Amplifier's audio input. blue green
white white
D. Connection to a 5.1CH Analog Amplifier (ONLY DVD-E365, E370)
1. If using audio cables for 5.1 CH Analog

red rojo
Amplifier (not included) connect the 5.1CH red
ANALOG AUDIO OUT terminals on the rear of yellow
the DVD player to the 5.1CH ANALOG AUDIO video cable◄ A

audio cable
IN terminals of the 5.1CH Analog Amplifier.
component
cable
◄ B
2. Using the video signal cable(s), connect white
yellow red blue
green
red
the VIDEO or COMPONENT terminals on
the rear of the DVD player to the VIDEO
or COMPONENT terminals of your TV as
described on pages. D
Front (RH) Front (LH)
Center
3. Turn on the DVD player, TV, and Amplifier. Rear (RH) Rear (LH) Subwoofer
4. Press the input select button of the Amplifier

to select external input in order to hear sound
from the DVD player.
DVD-E370
DVD-E365
2-Channel stereo amplifier or
Dolby digital red white
coaxial cable ◄ C audio cable
blue green
white white
red Rojo
yellow
audio cable
video cable ◄ A component
◄B
cable
yellow red blue green

red white
5
Basic functions Using the Display Function
When Playing a DVD/VCD/MPEG4
Playing a Disc
1. During play, press the TOOLS button on the remote control.
Before Play 2. Press the π/† buttons to select the desired item.
- Turn on your TV and set it to the correct Video Input by pressing TV/VIDEO button on the TV 3. Press the √/® buttons to make the desired setup.
remote control. 4. To make the screen disappear, press the TOOLS button again.
- If you connected an external Audio System, turn on your Audio System and set it to the cor
The functions when using the Display function are listed in the table below.
rect Audio Input.
To access the desired title when there is more than one in the disc. For example, if there is
After plugging in the player, the first time you press the DVD POWER button, this screen comes up: more than one movie on a DVD, each movie will be identified.
If you want to select a language, press the π/† button, and then press the ENTER button. (This
screen will only appear when you plug in the player for the first time.)If the language for the startup Most DVD discs are recorded in chapters so that you can quickly find a specific passage.
screen is not set, the set-tings may change whenever you turn the power on or off. Therefore, make
sure that you select the language you want to use.Once you select a menu language, you can Allows playback of the film from a desired time. You must enter the starting time as a reference. The time
change it by pressing the ®|| button on the front panel of the unit for more than 5 seconds with no search function does not operate on some discs.
disc in the unit. Then the SELECT MENU LANGUAGE window appears again where you can reset
Lets you select the soundtrack language for a film. A DVD disc can have up to eight different soundtracks.
your preferred language.
Lets you select the subtitle language or, if you prefer, turn off subtitles. A DVD disc can have up to 32 differ-
Using the Search and Skip Functions ent sets of subtitles, each in a different language.
During play, you can search quickly through a chapter or track, and use the skip function to jump to EZ
Lets you choose the EZ-View type
the next selection.
Searching through a Chapter or Track Select to activate the Zoom function.
During play, press the SEARCH (k or K) button on the remote control for more than 1 second.
Some DVDs have scenes that have been recorded at multiple angles. Use the Angle function to view a
Note
DVD 2X, 4X, 8X, 16X, 32X scene at one of those angles.
- The speed marked in this function may be different from the
CD 2X, 4X, 8X, 16X, 32X actual playback speed. Using the Disc and Title Menu
VCD 4X, 8X - No sound is hearing during search mode (Except CD).
During the playback of a DVD disc, press the Disc Menu/Title Menu button on the remote control.
Skipping Tracks
Note
During play, press the SKIP (|k or K|) button. - Depending on a disc, the Disc Menu/Title Menu may not work.
- When playing a DVD, if you press the SKIP (K|) button, it moves to the next chapter. If you - You can also use the Disc Menu, using the DISC MENU button on the remote control.
press the SKIP (|k) button, it moves to the beginning of the chapter. One more press makes it - Title Menu will only be displayed if there are at least two titles in the disc.
move to the beginning of the previous chapter.
Repeat Play
- When playing a VCD, if you press the SKIP (K|) button, it moves to the next track. If you press
the SKIP (|k) button, it moves to the beginning of the track. One more press makes it move to Repeat the current track, chapter, title, a chosen section (A-B), or all of the disc.
the beginning of the previous track. When playing a DVD/VCD
- If a track exceeds 15 minutes when playing a VCD and you press the K| button, it moves for- 1. Press the REPEAT button on the remote control. Repeat screen appears.
ward 5 minutes. If you press the |k button, it moves to the beginning of the track. One more 2. Press the REPEAT or π/† button to change playback mode. DVD repeats play by chapter or
press makes it move to the beginning of the previous track. title.
- Off.
- Title : repeats the title that is playing.
- Chapter : repeats the chapter that is playing.
- Repeat A-B
6
Using the A-B Repeat function (Only DVD-E360K) Note
1. Press the REPEAT button on the remote control. The repeat screen appears. This function may behave differently depending on the type of disc.
2. Press the π/† button to select the REPEAT A-B and then press ENTER.
3. Press the ENTER at the point where you want repeat play to start (A).
Selecting the Audio Language
4. Press the ENTER at the point where you want repeat play to start (B). You can select a desired audio language quickly and easily with the AUDIO button.
Using the A-B Repeat function (Only DVD-E370,E365, E360,E530) Using the AUDIO (√) button (DVD/VCD/MPEG4)
1. Press the REPEAT A-B button on the remote control. 1. During play, Press the AUDIO (√) button. Change the audio language by pressing the π/†
2.Press the REPEAT A-B button at the point where you want repeat play to start (A). button.
3.Press the REPEAT A-B button at the point where you want the repeat play to stop (B). - The audio languages are represented by abbreviations.
3. To return to normal play, press the REPEAT A-B button until the display shows Repeat : Off. 2. To remove the AUDIO icon, press the RETURN button.
Note
Note - This function depends on audio languages are encoded on the disc and may not work.
- A-B REPEAT allows you to set point (B) directly after point (A) has been set. - A DVD disc can contain up to 8 audio languages.
- Depending on a disc, the Repeat function may not work.
Selecting the Subtitle Language
Slow Play You can select a desired subtitle quickly and easily with the SUBTITLE/(π) button.
Using the SUBTITLE (π) button (DVD/MPEG4)
This feature allows you slowly to repeat scenes con-taining sports, dancing, musical instruments
being played etc., so you can study them more closely. 1. During play, Press the SUBTITLE (π) button.
2. Press the SUBTITLE (π) or π/† button to change the language. Each time you press the
When playing a DVD
SUBTITLE (π) or π/† button, the language changes.
1. During play, press the PLAY ( ) button. 3. To remove the SUBTITLE icon, press the RETURN button.
2. Press the SEARCH (k/K) button to choose the play speed between 1/2, 1/4, 1/8,1/16 and so
Note
on. If you want to go normal play press PLAY button.
- The subtitle languages are represented by abbreviations.
Advanced functions - You have to change the desired subtitle in the Disc Menu, according to discs. Press the DISC MENU
button.
- This function depends on what subtitles are encoded on the disc and may not work on all DVDs.
Adjusting the Aspect Ratio (EZ View) - A DVD disc can contain up to 32 subtitle languages.
To play back using aspect ratio (DVD)
Changing the Camera Angle
2. Press the π/† buttons to select icon. Each time you press the √/® buttons, the screen size
EZ When a DVD contains multiple angles of a particular scene, you can use the ANGLE function.
changes. For graphics of the screen sizes and lists of the sequences in which the sizes change, Using the ANGLE function (DVD)
see the next column. If the disc contains multiple angles, the ANGLE appears on the screen.
3. Press the RETURN button to exit EZ View.
If you are using a 16:9 TV If you are using a 4:3 TV 2. Press the π/† buttons to select icon. When the angle screen is displayed, press the √/®
For 16:9 aspect ratio discs For 16:9 aspect ratio discs buttons on the remote control to select the desired angle option.
- WIDE SCREEN - 4:3 Letter Box Using the Bookmark Function
- SCREEN FIT - 4:3 Pan Scan
This feature lets you bookmark sections of a DVD or VCD (Menu Off mode) so you can quickly find
- ZOOM FIT - SCREEN FIT
them at a later time.
For 4:3 aspect ratio discs - ZOOM FIT
Using the Bookmark Function (DVD/VCD)
- Normal Wide For 4:3 aspect ratio discs
- SCREEN FIT - Normal Screen 1. During play, press the MARKER button on the remote control.
- ZOOM FIT - SCREEN FIT 2. When you reach the scene you want to mark, press the √/® or π/† buttons, and then press
- Vertical Fit - ZOOM FIT MARKER button. Up to 12 scenes may be marked at a time.
7
Note MP3/WMA/CD Audio Playback
- Depending on a disc, the Bookmark function may not work.
1. Open the disc tray. Place the disc on the tray. Close the tray.
Recalling a Marked Scene 2. Press the √/® buttons to select a Music folder, and then press ENTER. Press the π/† buttons
1. During play, press the MARKER button on the remote control. to select a song file, and then press the ENTER to begin playback of the song.
2. Press the √/® orπ/† buttons to select a marked scene.
Repeat/Random playback
3. Press the PLAY ( ) button to skip to the marked scene.
Press the REPEAT button to change the playback mode. There are four modes, such as Off, Track,
Clearing a Bookmark Folder1and Random.
1. During play, press the MARKER button on the remote control. - Off ( ): Normal Playback
2. Press the √/® orπ/† buttons to select the bookmark number you want to delete. - Track ( 1 ): Repeats
1 the current song file.
3. Press the ENTER button to delete a bookmark number. - Folder ( ): Repeats the song files which have the same extension in the current folder.
- Random ( ): Song1 files which have the same extension will be played in random order.
Using the Zoom Function To resume normal play, press the REPEAT button until the Repeat : Off.
- Using the Zoom Function (DVD-E365, E350) CD-R MP3/WMA file
1. During play or pause mode, press the ZOOM button on the remote control.
When you record MP3 or WMA files on CD-R, please refer to the following.
- Using the Zoom Function (DVD-E370,E360K,E360) - Your MP3 or WMA files should be ISO 9660 or JOLIET format.
1. During play or pause mode, press the TOOLS buttons on the remote control. ISO 9660 format and Joliet MP3 or WMA files are compatible with Microsoft’s DOS and Windows, and with
2. Press the π/† buttons to select icon, then press the ENTER button. Apple’s Mac. This format is the most widely used.
- During DVD play, press ENTER to zoom in 1X/2X/3X/4X Normal in order. - When naming your MP3 or WMA files, do not exceed 8 characters, and enter “.mp3, .wma” as the file extension.
General name format : Title.mp3. or Title.wma. When composing your title, make sure that you use 8 char-
acters or less, have no spaces in the name, and avoid the use of special characters including: (.,/,\,=,+).
Clips Menu for MP3/WMA/JPEG/MPEG4/CD Audio - Use a decompression transfer rate of at least 128 Kbps when recording MP3 files.
Sound quality with MP3 files basically depends on the rate of compression/decompression you choose.
CD Audio or discs with MP3/WMA/JPEG/MPEG4 contain individual songs and/or pictures that can
Getting CD audio sound requires an analog/digital sampling rate, that is conversion to MP3 format, of at
be organized into folders as shown below. They are similar to how you use your computer to put
least 128 Kbps and up to 160 Kbps. However, choosing higher rates, like 192 Kbps or more, only rarely give
files into different folders.
Videos \ 1/2 Pages
better sound quality. Conversely, files with decompression rates below 128 Kbps will not be played prop-
To go access these folders and the files in them, follow these steps :
erly.
1. Open the disc tray. Place the disc on the tray. - Use a decompression transfer rate of at least 64Kbps when recording WMA files.
2. Close the tray. The tray closes and the Parent Folder Menu screen Sound quality with WMA files basically depends on the rate of compression/decompression you choose.
appears (top screen image.) Parent folders contain all the Peer folders Getting CD audio sound requires an analog/digital sampling rate, that is conversion to WMA format, of
that have the same kind of content: music, video, photos, etc.
CD Pages Move Return
at least 64Kbps and up to 192Kbps. Conversely, files with decompression rates below 64Kbps or over
3. Press the √/® buttons to select the Parent folder of your choice, and 192Kbps will not be played properly. Sampling rate that can be supported for WMA files is > 30Khz.
then press the ENTER. A screen displaying the Peer folders appears. The Peer folders contain - Do not try recording copyright protected MP3 files.
all the folders with the same kind of content (video, music, photos, etc.) that are in the Parent Certain “secured” files are encrypted and code protected to prevent illegal copying. These files are of the
folder. following types: Windows MediaTM (registered trade mark of Microsoft Inc) and SDMITM (registered trade mark
of The SDMI Foundation). You cannot copy such files.
Folder Selection - Important:
The folder can be selected both in Stop or Play mode. The above recommendations cannot be taken as a guarantee that the DVD player will play MP3 recordings,
or as an assurance of sound quality. You should note that certain technologies and methods for MP3 file
- To select the Parent Folder
Press the RETURN button to go to parent folder, or press the π/† buttons to select “..” and recording on CD-Rs prevent optimal playback of these files on your DVD player (degraded sound quality
press ENTER to go to the parent folder. and in some cases, inability of the player to read the files).
- To select the Peer Folder - This unit can play a maximum of 500 files and 500 folders per disc.
Press the π/† buttons to select the desired folder, then press ENTER.
- To select the Sub-Folder
Press the π/† buttons to select the desired folder, then press ENTER.
8
Qpel and GMC are also supported.) Possible warning messages that may appear
MPEG4 Playback
DVD-RW & DVD+R when trying to play DivX/AVI files are :
MPEG4 Play Function Format that support for DivX file : 1. No Authorization
AVI files are used to contain the audio and video data. Only AVI format files with the “.avi” exten- - Basic DivX format DivX3.11 / 4.12/ 5.x - File with bad registration code.
sions can be played. - DivX Pro 2. Unsupported Codec
- File format : *.avi, *.div, *.divx. - Files with certain Codec Types, Versions
1. Open the disc tray. Place the disc on the tray. Close the tray. (ex. MP4, AFS and other proprietary
This unit supports all resolutions up to maximum below.
2. Press the √/® buttons to select a Videos Menu , then press the ENTER. Press the π/† to codecs) are not suppoerted by this player.
select an avi file (DivX) then press the ENTER. DivX5 3. Unsupported Resolution
Repeat and Repeat A-B playback 720 x 480 @30fps - Files containing resolutions higher than the
720 x 576 @25fps: player’s specification are not supported.
1. Press the REPEAT button , then press REPEAT or π/† buttons to change playback mode.
There are 3 modes, such as Off, Title and Folder. Maximum bitrate : 4Mbps
- Off : No Repeat mode.
Note
- Title : repeats the title that is playing.
• The resolution that can be supported by DVD-E370,E360K,E360,E365,E350 model up to 720 x 480
- Folder : repeats the AVI files which have the same extension in the current folder.
@30 frames/ 720 x 576 @25 frames.
- Repeat A-B
• This unit supports CD-R/RW written in MPEG4 in accordance with the “ISO9660 format”.
Repeat A-B playback (Only DVD-E360K)
1. Press the REPEAT button on the remote control. The repeat screen appears. Playing Media Files Using the USB Host feature
2. Press the π/† button to select the REPEAT A-B and then press ENTER.
3. Press the ENTER at the point where you want repeat play to start (A).
(Only DVD-E370, E360K, E360)
4. Press the ENTER at the point where you want repeat play to start (B). You can enjoy the media files such as pictures, movies andtunes saved in an MP3 player, USB
Repeat A-B playback (Only DVD-E370, E360, E365, E350) memory or digital camera in high audio by connecting the storage device to the USB port of the
DVD Player.
1. Press the REPEAT A-B button on the remote control.
Using the USB HOST feature
2. Press the REPEAT A-B button at the point where you want repeat play to start (A).
3. Press the REPEAT A-B button at the point where you want the repeat play to stop (B) 1. Connect the USB device to the USB port on the front of the unit.
- To return to normal play, press the REPEAT A-B button until the display shows Repeat : Off. 2. The USB Menu screen appears. Press the √/® button to select Menu, then press ENTER.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select a file in the USB device. Press ENTER to Open the file.
Note
- A-B REPEAT allow you to set point (B) directly after point (A) has been set. Switching Between DVD and USB
If you have a disk in the player, and you are viewing or listening to files on a USB device, or the
MPEG4 Function Description USB Menu is on the screen, you can switch from the USB device to the disc by pressing the USB
button on the remote.
Function Description
Also, you can switch from the disc to the USB device by pressing the USB button on the remote.
Skip “USB loading...” appears on the screen, and then the USB Menu appears.
During play, press the |k or K| button, it moves to next or previous track.
(|k or K|)
Note
During play, press the SEARCH (k or K) button and press again to search at • Depends on the file size and clip duration, loading time on USB may take longer than using CD or DVD
Search
a faster speed. Allows you to search at a faster speed in an AVI file. (2X, 4X, 8X, media.
(k or K)
16X, 32X)
Safe USB Removal
During play, press the PLAY ( ( ) button, and then press the SEARCH (K) button
Slow Motion Play 1. Press the USB button to return to disc mode or the main screen.
to view video at a slower speed. (1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16)
2. Press the STOP (■) button
ZOOM X1/X2/X3/X4/Normal in order 3. Remove the USB cable.
- These functions may not work depending on MPEG4 file. Skip Forward/Back
CD-R AVI fileThis - DivX 4 contents (Based on MPEG-4 Simple During playback, press the (|k/K|) button.
unit can play the following video compression Profile) • When there is more than one file, when you press the K| button, the next file is selected.
formats within the AVI file format: - DivX 5 contents (MPEG-4 simple profile plus • When there is more than one file, when you press the |k button, the previous file is selected.
- DivX 3.11 contents additional features such as bi-directional frames.
9
Fast playback Note
To play back the disc at a faster speed, press (k/K) during playback - To cancel copying in progress, press the ENTER button.
• Each time you press either button, the playback speed will change as follows : 2X ➞ 4X ➞ 8X - To return to the CDDA screen, press the TOOLS button again.
➞ 16X ➞ 32X. - While the CD is being ripped, the player will automatically enter stop mode.
- The ripping process is 2.6 times of normal speed.
Compatible Devices
- The DVD player can only rip Audio CD (CD DA) discs.
1. USB devices that support USB Mass Storage v1.0.(USB devices that operate as a removable disk in - The USB button does not work while you’re in the Ripping menu.
Windows (2000 or later) without additional driver installation.)
- CD ripping function may not supported for some MP3 players device.
2. MP3 Player: Flash type MP3 player.
3. Digital camera: Cameras that support USB Mass Storage v1.0.
• Cameras that operate as a removable disk in Windows (2000 or later) without additional driver Picture CD Playback
installation. 1. Select the desired folder.
4. USB Flash Drive: Devices that support USB2.0 or USB1.1. 2. Press the π/† buttons to select a Picture file in the clips menu and then press the ENTER button.
• You may experience a difference in playback quality when you connect a USB1.1 device.
5. USB card Reader: One slot USB card reader and Multi slot USB card reader Note
• Depending on the manufacturer. the USB card reader may not be supported. - Press the STOP button to return to the clips menu.
• If you install multiple memory devices into a multi card reader, you may experience problems. - When playing a Kodak Picture CD, the unit displays the Photo directly, not the clips menu.
6. If you use a USB extension cable, the USB device might not be recognized.
Rotation
Note
• CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported. - Press the TOOLS button to select Rotate, and then press the ENTER button.
• Digital Cameras that use PTP protocol or require additional program installation when connected to - Each time the √/® buttons are pressed, the picture rotates 90 degrees clockwise.
a PC are not supported. - Each time the π button is pressed, the picture will reverse to the upside down to show a mirror image.
• A device using NTFS file system is not supported. (Only FAT 16/32 (File Allocation Table 16/32) file - Each time the † button is pressed, the picture will reverse to the right side to show a mirror image.
system is supported.)
• Some MP3 players, when connected to this product,may not operate depending on the sector size Zoom
of their file system. - Press the TOOLS button to select Zoom, and then press the ENTER button.
• The USB HOST function is not supported if a product that transfers media files by its manufacturer- - Each time ENTER button is pressed, the picture is enlarged. Zoom mode : X1-X2-X3-X4-X1.
specific program is connected. - Press the √/®/π/† buttons to move the enlarged picture so you can view different portions.
• Does not operate with Janus enabled MTP(Media Transfer Protocol) devices.
• The USB host function of this product does not support all USB devices. Slide Show
• The USB Host does not support USB Hard Disc Drives (HDD). - When you press the PLAY at JPEG file, it will go to full screen mode and automatically slide
show.
Note
CD Ripping (Only DVD-E370, E360K, E360)
- Depending on a file size, the amount of time between each picture may be different from the manual.
This feature allows you to copy audio files from a disc to a USB device in MP3 format. - If you don’t press any button, the slide show will start automatically in about 10 seconds by default.
Open the dics tray. Place the Audio CD(CD DA) disc on the tray, and close the tray. Connect the
CD-R JPEG Disc
USB device to the USB port on the front of the unit. Press the USB button.
- Only files with the “.jpg” and “.JPG” extensions can be played.
1. Press the TOOLS button to display the Ripping screen.
- If the disc is not closed, it will take longer to start playing and not all of the recorded files may be
2. Press the π/† buttons, then press the ENTER button to select files for ripping.
played.
- To deselect files, press ENTER button again.
- Only CD-R discs with JPEG files in ISO 9660 or Joliet format can be played.
3. Press the √ and † button to select START, then press the ENTER button begin ripping.
- The name of the JPEG file may not be longer than 8 characters and should contain no blank spaces
The Ripping menu contain the following buttons :
or special characters (. / = +).
- Mode (Fast/Normal)
- Only a consecutively written multi-session disc can be played. If there is a blank segment in the multi-
- Bitrate, press ENTER to change : 128kbps ➞ 192kbps ➞ 128kbps.
session disc, the disc can be played only up to the blank segment.
• Standard : 128kbps
- A maximum of 500 images can be stored on a single CD.
• Better Quality : 192kbps
- Kodak Picture CDs are recommended.
- Device selection, press ENTER to change between partitions on the USB device (max 4).
- When playing a Kodak Picture CD, only the JPEG files in the pictures folder can be played.
- Select - Unselect, press ENTER to change from Select all (files) or Select none.
- Kodak Picture CD: The JPEG files in the pictures folder can be played automatically.
10
- Konica Picture CD: If you want to see the Picture, select the JPEG files in the clips menu. 2. Choose My Karaoke setting in Setting --> Audio --> My Karaoke and then select one of three enable
- Fuji Picture CD: If you want to see the Picture, select the JPEG files in the clips menu. mode :
- QSS Picture CD: The unit may not play QSS Picture CD. - Original Vocal : This setting will keep the original vocal sound.
- If the number of files in 1 Disc is over 500, only 500 JPEG files can be played. - Min. Reduction : this setting reduce the main vocals sound sligthly.
- If the number of folders in 1 Disc is over 500, only JPEG files in 500 folders can be played. - Max. Reduction : This setting will reduce the main vocals sound greatly
3. Insert and play DVD or VCD media, this feature only for VCD.DVD non karaoke type.
Karaoke functions (Only DVD-E360K) Note
Karaoke Functions 1. Feature will disabled when :
- Removing the microphone, or
Operation Sequence - Changing “My Karaoke” settings to “Original Vocals” or
1. Connect the terminals Mixed Audio Out to TV or Amplifier. - Playing Karaoke audio, or
2. Connect the microphone plug to Mic (microphone) and set Karaoke score to On. When MIC is - Playing non supported file type (ex : *.avi: *.mp3; *.divx; etc)
connected and Karaoke score is On, the karaoke functions can be used. 2. No pop-up notification when feature disabled.
Echo/Microphone Volume/Key Control (Tone control)
1. Play the karaoke disc containing the songs you want.
‑ Press the KARAOKE (†) button, and then press π/† to select ECHO, VOL or KEY.
Changing setup menu
2. Press the √/® buttons to change the desired item. Using the Setup Menu
Karaoke Scoring (Score) The Setup menu lets you customize your DVD player by allowing you to select various language
The scoring will appear as : preferences, set up a parental level, even adjust the player to the type of television screen you
1. The microphone is connected and Karaoke score is On. have.
2. At the end of each chapter/title of karaoke disc. 1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button on the remote control. Press the √/® but-
- If the DVD karaoke have any information on the scoring drive. tons to select SettingS, then press the ENTER button.
- In case of VCD, the device can not differentiate between hard karaoke or movies, then the 2. Press the π/† buttons to select a Setup Menu, then press the ® or ENTER to bring up the
scoring will always appear. sub-menu.
3. Karaoke score will appear at the end of time for each chapter/title for about 6s. 3. Press the π/† buttons to select a sub-menu option, then press the ® or ENTER.
Karaoke Sound Recording 4. To make the setup screen disappear after setting up, press the RETURN button.
1. Insert USB storage media into USB jack and then connected the microphone plug to Mic.
2. To star karaoke recording, choose one of VCD/DVD/SVCD file, then press RECORD button. Setting Up the Display Options
3. When recording, user can only press STOP button and PAUSE button to cancel the recording. Display options enable you to set various video functions of the player.
4. If user do cancelation, then file result will be saved.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button. Press the √/® buttons to select
Note SettingS, then press the ENTER button.
- If you hear feedback(squealing or howling) while using the karaoke feature, move the microphone 2. Press the π/† buttons to select DIsplay, then press the ® or ENTER button.
away from the speakers or turn down the microphone volume or the speaker volume. 3. Press the π/† buttons to select the desired item, then press the ® or ENTER button.
- When playing MP3, WMA and LPCM disc, the karaoke functions will not operate.
Note
- When the MIC is connected, Digital Out does not work.
• Consult your TV User’s Manual to find out if your TV supports Progressive Scan. If
- The MIC sound outputs only from Analog Audio Out.
Progressive Scan is supported, follow the TV User’s Manual regarding Progressive Scan set-
- If MIC is connected to the MIC jack on the front panel, 5.1CH audio will be changed in to 2 CH audio
tings in the TV’s menu system.
automatically, this condition can’t be change unless the MIC is plugged out.
• If Video Output is set incorrectly, the screen may be blocked.
MY KARAOKE • When the resolution is changed during playback, it may take a few seconds for a normal
image to appear.
My Karaoke is the feature that makes non karaoke VCD/DVD can be used like karaoke disc, by
removing lead singer vocal sound.
Using the My Karaoke feature :
1. Connect the microphone.
11
Setting Up the Audio Options Setting Up the System Options
Audio Options allows you to setup the audio device and sound status settings depending on the audio 1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button. Press the √/® buttons to select SettingS,
system in use. then press the ENTER button.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button. Press the √/® buttons to select Setting, 2. Press the π/† buttons to select System, then press the ® or ENTER button.
then press the ENTER button. 3. Press the π/† buttons to select the desired item, then press the ® or ENTER button.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select Audio, then press the ® or ENTER button.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select the desired item, then press the ® or ENTER button. Setting Up the Language Features
Note : If you set the player menu, disc menu, audio and subtitle language in advance, they will come up
- When play a disc that has MPEG Audio and you have Bitstream selected in the Audio Options menu, automatically every time you watch a movie.
the Digital Audio jack may not output audio
- There is no analogue audio output when you play a sound disc. 1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button. Press the √/® buttons to select SettingS,
- Even when PCM Down sampling is Off then press the ENTER button.
• Some discs will only output down sampled audio through the digital outputs. 2. Press the π/† buttons to select Language, then press the ® or ENTER button.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select the desired language, then press the ® or ENTER button.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trade- Note
marks of Dolby Laboratories. - The language is selected and the screen returns to Language Setup menu.
- To make the setup menu disappear, press the MENU button.
Surround Sound Speaker Setup (Only DVD-E370, E365) - If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the original pre-recorded language is selected.
- Select “Original” if you want the defaultsoundtrack language to be the original language the disc is
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button. Press the √/® buttons to select Setting,
recorded in.
then press the ENTER button.
- Select “Automatic” if you want the subtitle language to be the same as the language selected as the
2. Press the π/† buttons to select Audio, then press the ® or ENTER button.
audio language.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select Speaker Setup, then press the ® or ENTER button.
- Some discs may not contain the language you select as your initial language; in that case the disc will use
4. Press the π/†/√/® buttons to select the desired item, then press the ENTER button to set
its original language setting.
the speaker.
Note Setting Up the Security Options

To make the setup menu disappear, press the MENU button.
Setting up Test The Parental Control function works in conjunction with DVDs that have been assigned a rating, which
helps you control the types of DVDs that your family watches. There are up to 8 rating levels on a disc.
The test output signals come clockwise starting from the Front Speaker(L).
Adjust Channel Balance so that speakers output equally in your room. Setting Up the Rating Level
FRONT(L) ➝ CENTER ➝ FRONT(R) ➝ SURROUND(R) ➝ SURROUND(L) ➝ SUBWOOFER 1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button. Press the √/® buttons to select SETTINGS,
and then press the ENTER button.
Note 2. Press the π/† buttons to select SECURITY, and then press the ® or ENTER button.
To make the Setup menu disappear or return to menu screen during set up, press RETURN 3. The first time you access security, you must enter the default password: 0000. To enter the default
button.
password, highlight 0 on the screen and press the ENTER button 4 times. To change the default
• The subwoofer test output signal is lower than the other speakers.
• The MPEG Multichannel logo is a trademark registered by PHILIPS Corporation. password.
• If you set Front (L, R) “Small”, LFE (Subwoofer) is set “On” automatically. 4. Press the π/† buttons to select PARENTAL, and then press the ® or ENTER button.
5. Press the π/† buttons to select the rating level you want, and then press the ENTER button.
The higher the rating level, the more mature the allowable content.
- If you select the Kid Safe level, discs rated level 2 or higher will not play unless you enter the pass
word.
12
Security Levels :
❶ KID SAFE Reference
❷ G (General Audiences) : All Ages Admitted
❸ PG (Parental Guidance suggested) : Some material may not be suitable for young children. Troubleshooting
❹ PG 13 (PG-13 Parents strongly cautioned) : Some material may be inapproriate for children under
13. Before requesting service (troubleshooting), please check the following.
❺ PGR (Parental Guidance Recommended) : These are not necessarily unsuitable for children, but
viewer discretion is advised, and parents and guardians are encouraged to supervise younger view- Problem Action
ers.
❻ R (Restricted) : Under 17 requires accompanying adult • Press the ®|| button (in front panel) for more than 5 seconds under no
The screen is blocked.
❼ NC17 (NC-17) : No one 17 and under admitted. disc inside. All setting will revert to factory settings.
❽ ADULT
Note: • Press the ®|| button (in front panel) for more than 5 seconds under no
- If you have forgotten your password, see “Forgot Password” in the Troubleshooting Guide. Forgot password. disc inside. All setings including the password will revert to the factory
Changing the Password settings. Don't use this unless absolutely necessary.
To change the password, follow these steps:
• 5.1 channel sound is reproduced only when the following conditions are met. :
1. On the Settings Menu, Select Security, and then press the ENTER button.
5.1 channel sound 1) The DVD player is connected with the proper Amplifier
2. Enter the current 4 digit password. If you have never changed the password, enter the default
is not being repro- 2) The disc is recorded with 5.1 channel sound.
password: 0000. To enter a number, use the √/®/π/† buttons to highlight a number, and then duced. • Check whether the disc being played has the “5.1 ch” mark on the outside.
press the ENTER button. (DVD-E370,E365) • Check if your audio system is connected and working properly.
3. Select Change Password, and then press the ENTER button.
• In a SETUP Menu, is the Audio Output set to Bitstream?
4. Enter the new 4 digit password. Use the √/®/π/† buttons to select a number, and then press
the ENTER button. Repeat 4 times.
5. Re-enter the new password in the same manner to confirm. The Security menu re-appears.
Setting Up the General Options

SettingS, then press the ENTER button.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select General, then press the ® or ENTER button.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select the desired item, then press the ® or ENTER button.
Setting Up the Support Options

Support option enable you to check your DVD player information such as the model code,
Software Version, The serial and version numbers can be found on the back side of your DVD-
Player.
SETTINGS, then press the ENTER button.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select SUPPORT, then press the ® or ENTER button.
3. Select PRODUCT INFORMATION, then press the ® or ENTER button.
13
Spesifications Memo
Power Requirements AC110~240V, 50/60Hz
For the power supply and power con-

Power Comsumption sumption, refer to the label attached
to the product
General Weight 1.10 Kg
Dimensions 300mm(W) X 208mm(D) X 42mm(H)
Operating Temperature Range +5ºC to +35ºC
Operating Humidity Range 10 % to 75 %
Composite Video 1 channel : 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω load)
Video Output Y : 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω load)

Component Video Pr : 0.70 Vp-p (75 Ω load)
Pb : 0.70 Vp-p (75 Ω load)
Output terminal 2 CH
Maximum Output Level 2Vrms
Audio Output Frequency Response 20 Hz to 20 kHz
5.1 Channel (DVD-E370, E365) F/L,F/R,R/L,R/R,CT,S/W
Digital Audio Out Coaxial terminal (S/PDIF)
14
Memo
15
Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE
If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer care centre.
Area Contact Centre  Web Site Area Contact Centre  Web Site
` Asia Pacific U.A.E 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com
AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 www.samsung.com OMAN 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com
NEW ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786) www.samsung.com KUWAIT 183-2255 www.samsung.com
CHINA 400-810-5858 www.samsung.com BAHRAIN 8000-4726 www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/hk Egypt 08000-726786 www.samsung.com
HONG KONG (852) 3698 4698 www.samsung.com/hk_en/ JORDAN 800-22273 www.samsung.com
1800 1100 11 IRAN 021-8255 www.samsung.com
3030 8282
INDIA www.samsung.com Morocco 080 100 2255 www.samsung.com
1800 3000 8282
1800 266 8282 Saudi Arabia 9200-21230 www.samsung.com
0800-112-8888 ` Africa
INDONESIA www.samsung.com
021-5699-7777 NIGERIA 0800-726-7864 www.samsung.com
MALAYSIA 1800-88-9999 www.samsung.com 0800-10077
Ghana www.samsung.com
1-800-10-SAMSUNG(726-7864) for PLDT 0302-200077
1-800-3-SAMSUNG(726-7864) for Digitel Cote D’ Ivoire 8000 0077 www.samsung.com
PHILIPPINES www.samsung.com
1-800-8-SAMSUNG(726-7864) for Globe Senegal 800-00-0077 www.samsung.com
02-5805777
Cameroon 7095- 0077 www.samsung.com
SINGAPORE 1800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com
KENYA 0800 724 000 www.samsung.com
1800-29-3232
THAILAND www.samsung.com UGANDA 0800 300 300 www.samsung.com
02-689-3232
0800-329-999 TANZANIA 0685 88 99 00 www.samsung.com
TAIWAN www.samsung.com SOUTH AFRICA 0860-SAMSUNG(726-7864 ) www.samsung.com
0266-026-066
VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 www.samsung.com
` Middle East
AK68-02197A-00
AK68-02197A-00
DOUBLE ISOLATED TV/RADIO
OUTLETS
NAVAL MODEL
N1
Double isolated TV/Radio Outlets
Naval double galvanically isolated outlets N1
with IEC 9.5 mm connectors or F-connectors
are a new series that have been designed
especially for marine use and covers the
complete TV-Radio frequencies of 0.1–890
MHz world-wide.
N1 is galvanically isolated from both ground
and cable innerlead to avoid problems with
interference and grounding which are quite
common in larger systems.
N1 is for star net only, where each output
from a tap-off or a splitter can feed max. one
N1.
The frame called N, for surface mounting, is
designed to fit all the Naval outlets.
It is manufactured in white plastic RAL 1013.
The standard supply of Naval outlets includes
a full size white cover RAL 1013 (76 x 76 mm)
however other covers can be supplied on
request. N1 need not be terminated.
If the outlets are intended for either TV or
Radio only, please order covers separately. NB
these covers do only fit IEC version.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS N1
Frequency range: TV 47–68 MHz; 130–890 MHz
R 0.1–30 MHz‚ 88–108 MHz
Through loss: In-TV 47~68 MHz 1 dB nom. 2.8 dB max.
130~890 MHz 1 dB nom. 1.5 dB max.
In-R 0.1~30 MHz 2.5 dB nom. 4 dB max.
88~108 MHz 1 dB nom. 1.8 dB max.
Isolation: TV-R 12 dB min.
Return loss: In 5~890 MHz 8 dB min.
TV 47~68 MHz 8 dB min.
130~890 MHz 8 dB min.
R 88~108 MHz 8 dB min.
Connectors: Input Terminal block
TV ”F” Female/IEC male
R ”F” Female/IEC female
Impedance: 75 Ohms
Galvanic isolation: 400 V
Optional 2.5 kV with reduced frequency
range only special order
Screening factor: TV 35 dB
R 43 dB
Operating temp.: -40 – +60°C
0502
Size: (H) 76 x (W) 76 x (D) 32 mm
Tel. +46(0)40-29 20 45. Fax +46(0)40-18 74 13
All specifications stated are subject to change without notice. E-mail:sales@naval.se www.naval.se 7101A
Double isolated TV/Radio Outlets
N1 Schematic
69.5
55.9 As optional, we have made two new covers for our

30.0 outlets in case only TV or Radio should be distributed.
Holes
4x3.75 mm ¯ 4-3/8"-32UNEF
10.0
E A
13.0
IN OUT
9.0
10.0
23.5
29.6
Recomended cable for N1

60.0 TV cover for outlet N1 IEC only.
76.6
54.0
Radio cover for outlet N1 IEC only.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS N1
Mechanical:
Material of products Housing: Zn95.38 Cu0.586 Ni0.0147 Sn0.0027
Connector: Phosphor Bronze Sn plated.
Isolator: ABS 94HB BLACK RAL9005
HOLES Mechanical specification of F-connector Standard: according to IEC
2x4.75 mm ¯ 169-24 12G(U.S.A)8 Range of adopted cable’s central pin: Ø0.4–Ø1.2 mm.
Pull Force: Min. 0.5N
Application: ETS 3000019
Protection: IP50 (same as DIN40050)
Storaging temperature: -40…. +80°C
Cover and frame
Colour: White RAL1013
31.7
Material: ABS plastic

13.0
Outlet: N1 IEC Order No. 201.503-I

11.0
N1 F Order No. 201.503-F
N frame Order No. 201.501
TV cover Order No. 201.498 for IEC only.
Radio cover Order No. 201.499 for IEC only.
Weight: 0.15 kg, Standard package: 1
TAP OFF
NAVAL MODEL
TO4F
Tap-off TO2F & Tap-off TO4F
Naval tap-offs TO4 and TO2 have been
designed especially for marine use and
the complete TV/Radio frequencies of
0.1–1000 MHz worldwide. In order to avoid
interference due to connection between the
splitter and the ship’s hull, the splitter base
is manufactured in plastic to make
it double isolated.
Unused outputs of tap-offs do not need
to be terminated. The last line output has to
be terminated with 75 Ohms terminating
connector (e.g. 500.207).

Holes: 4 x 4.0 mm
Tap-off TO4F 4-ways with F-connectors
TO4F-12 TO4F-17 TO4F-21
Frequency range: 0.1–1000 MHz 0.1–1000 MHz 0.1–1000 MHz
Tap loss: 12.5 dB 17 dB 21 dB
Through loss: 4.5 dB 3.5 dB 3.5 dB
Tap-off TO2F 2-ways with F-connectors
TO2F-12 TO2F-17
Frequency range: 0.1–1000 MHz 0.1–1000 MHz
Tap loss: 12.5 dB 17 dB
Through loss: 1.5 dB 1.5 dB
Electrical
Directional isolation: >17 dB
Isolation, TV-TV: >36 dB
Return loss: >20 dB
Screening factor: 75 dB
Impedance: 75 Ohm
Operating temp: -40°C – +60°C
CE specifications according to EN50082-1, EN 50081-1,
DIN V VDE 0855 part 10
Return loss 20 dB from 40 MHz–1.5 dB/octave
Below 5 MHz the spec may vary
Mechanical
Material of product housing: Zn95.38 Cu0,586 Ni0.0147 Sn0.0027
Connector: Phosphor bronze Sn plated.
Insulator: ABS 94HB BLACK RAL9005
Mechanical specification value of F-connector Standard: according to IEC 169-24 Size: (H) 57 mm x (W) 75 mm x (D) 30 mm
12G(U.S.A)8 Range of adopted cable’s central pin: Ø0.4–Ø1.2 mm. Holes: 4 x 4.0 mm
Pull Force: Min. 0.5N
Protection: IP50 (same as DIN40050)
Storaging temperature: -40…. +80°CLabel: Background: gray similar to RAL 7032
Text: black RAL 9005
0409
Tel. +46(0)40-29 20 45. Fax +46(0)40-18 74 13
Tap-off TO2F & Tap-off TO4F
CA-0286 CA-0287 CA-0305 CA-0306

IN IN OUT
C3 C6 C11
C3 C8 C11
R2 R5 R7 R3
C1 C2 C6 C7
R3 R6 C1 C2 C5 C7 C9 C10
R4
C12 R2
R1 C4 C5 R4 C9 C10
TAP1
C4 C8
R1
R5
TAP2
TAP1 TAP2
CA-0288 CA-0289
C18
C15 C21 C24

R9 R14
R12
C13 C14 C19 C20
R10 R13
C16 C17 C22 C23

R8 R11
TAP3
TAP4
OUT
75.0
75.0
65.0
65.0
28.0
14.0
32.3
32.3
56.5
38.0
28.0
56.5
38.0
28.0
4-4.5 38.4 4-4.5 38.4

HOLES HOLES
76.8
5-3/8"-32-2A UNEF
39.0
2-R2.25
27.0
17.9
16.0
16.0
8.9
4.0
4.5
65.0
Tap off TO4F: TO4F-12 Order No. 201.552

TO4F-17 Order No. 201.550
Tap off TO2F: TO2F-12 Order No. 201.554
Weight: 0.1 kg
Standard package: 1
SPLITTER
NAVAL MODEL
SP4F & SP2F
Splitter SP4F & Splitter SP2F
Naval splitters SP2F and SP4F have been

designed especially for marine use and the
complete TV/Radio frequencies of
0.1–1000 MHz worldwide. In order to avoid
interference due to connection between the
splitter and the ship’s hull, the splitter base is
manufactured in plastic to make
it double isolated.

Holes: 4 x 4.0 mm
Splitter SP4F with F-connectors
Frequency range: 100 kHz–1000 MHz
Splitter loss: 8 dB
Splitter SP2F with F-connectors

Frequency range: 0.1–1000 MHz
Splitter loss: 3.5 dB
Electrical
Isolation, TV-TV: > 20 dB
Return loss: > 20 dB
Screening factor: 75 dB
Impedance: 75 Ohm
Operating temp: -40°C – +60°C
CE specifications according to EN50082-1, EN 5008-1,
DIN V VDE 0855 part 10
Return loss 20 dB from 40 MHz–1.5 dB/octave
Below 5 MHz the spec may vary
Mechanical
Material of product housing: Zn95.38 Cu0.586 Ni0.0147 Sn0.0027
Connector: Phosphor bronze Sn plated.
Isolator: ABS 94HB BLACK RAL9005
Mechanical specification of F-connector Standard: according
to IEC 169-24 12G(U.S.A)8 Range of adopted cable’s central
pin: Ø0.4–Ø1,2 mm. Pull Force: Min. 0.5N
Protection: IP50 (same as DIN40050) Holes: 4 x 4.0 mm
Storaging temperature: -40…. +80°C
Label: Background: gray similar to RAL 7032 Text: black RAL 9005
All outputs not used have to be terminated with a 75 Ohm terminating connector
(e.g 500.207).
0409
Tel. +46(0)40-29 20 45. Fax +46(0)40-18 74 13
Spliter SP4F Splitter SP2F
OUTPUT1
All outputs not used have to be terminated with All outputs not used have to be terminated with
a 75 Ohm terminating connector a 75 Ohm terminating connector
(e.g 500.207). CA-0283 (e.g 500.207).
CA-0282
R1 OUTPUT1
C1 C3
CA-0280
R3
INPUT CA-0195
INPUT OUTPUT2
CA-0281 R1
C5 OUTPUT3
C1 C2
CA-0283
CA-0282
OUTPUT2
R2
C2 C4
OUTPUT4
75.0 75.0
65.0 65.0
28.0 14.0
32.3
32.3
56.5
38.0
28.0
56.5
38.0
28.0
4-4.5 4-4.5
HOLES HOLES
Template Scale 1:1

(SP4F&SP2F)
38.4 5-3/8"-32-2A UNEF

39.0
2-R2.25
27.0
17.9
16.0
16.0
8.9
4.0
4.5
65.0
Splitter SP4F: Order No. 201.555 Weight: 0.1 kg

Splitter SP2F: Order No. 201.556 Standard package: 1
47 INCH LED 3D TV
LG MODEL
47LW4500
THE NEXT GENERATION 3D
TV
LG 47LW4500 LED PLUS, CINEMA 3D TV
47LW4500
THE NEXT GENERATION 3D TV
MORE COMFORT FOR YOUR EYES
COMFORTABLE CINEMA 3D GLASSES
BRILLIANT 3D PICTURES
LG 47LW4500 LED PLUS, CINEMA 3D TV

COMMON SPEC
Display Type 3D TV
Screen Size ( Inch ) 42
PICTURE
BLU Type Edge LED Plus
Resolution 1920x1080
TruMotion 100Hz (MCI: 400Hz)
Dynamic Contrast Ratio 7,000,000:1
Response Time(MPRT) 3ms
WCC (Wide Color Control) Yes
VIDEO
XD Engine Yes
Aspect Ratio Correction 8 Modes (16:9/Just scan/Original/4:3/14:9/Zoom/Cinema Zoom/Full Wide)
Color Temperature Control 3 Modes (Warm, Medium, Cool)
24p Real Cinema(24p 5:5/2:2 Pull down Mode) Yes
Expert Mode / ISF Ready Yes
xvyCC Yes
Picture Wizard II Yes
Picture Mode 8 Modes (Vivid,Standard,Natural,Cinema,Sport,Game, Expert1, Expert2)
Just Scan (0% overscan) HDMI (1080p /1080i/720p), Component (1080p/1080i/720p), RF (1080i/720p)
SOUND
Audio Output 10W+10W
Speaker System 1 Way 2 Speakers
Infinite Sound Yes
Bass/Treble/Balance Yes
Auto Volume Yes
Sound Mode 5 Modes (Standard, Music, Cinema, Sport, Game)
Clear Voice II Yes
FEATURE
3D Yes
SIMPLINK (HDMI CEC) Yes
USB MP3 / JPEG / DivX Yes / Yes
USB 2.0 MP3/JPEG
DLNA Yes
INTERFACE
USB 2.0 1
HDMI In 1
Headphone Out 1
RF In Yes
AV In Yes
Component in (Y,Pb,Pr) + Audio 2
HDMI Input 2
RGB In (D-sub 15pin) – PC Yes
PC Audio Input Yes
RS-232C (Control / SVC) Yes
RGB In (D-sub 15pin) Yes
Digital Audio Out Yes
POWER
Voltage, Hz 100 ~ 240V 50/60Hz
Consumption (IEC62087 dynamic broadcast-content video signal) 140
Standby (Off mode) 0.1W↓
DIMENSION
SET (w/o stand) 18.5
with stand 20.7
Packing 24.6
SET (w/o stand) 1115x683x29.9
with stand 1115x750x256
Packing 1330x810x141
CINEMA 3D SPECIFCATION
SG / Cinema Cinema
Module FPR
Module Maker LGD
Frequency FHD T120Hz
3D MEMC Yes
3D Local Dimming Yes
Cross talk 1%
Infinite 3D Sound Yes
Horizontal viewing angle Yes
Head tilt angle (available to watch lying) Yes
Converting 2D to 3D Yes (RF, HDMI, USB, DLNA, Component, Composite, RGB)
Converting 3D to 2D Yes (RF, HDMI, USB, DLNA, RGB)
Depth Control: 2D to 3D '0~+20 (default : 10)
Viewpoint Control: 3D contents -10~+10 (default : 0)
Viewpoint Control: 2D to 3D -10~+10 (default : 0)
UI Type 2D
3D camera still picture (MPF type) Yes
3D moving picture 3D WMV single stream
3D INPUT MODE
Component 2D to 3D
RGB T/B, S/S (1920x1080@60Hz)
USB T/B, S/S, C/B (1080p@30Hz)
Composite 2D to 3D
RF T/B, S/S (720p@60Hz/50Hz, 1080i@60Hz/50Hz)
3D GLASSES
Model Number AG-F210
Light Transmittance 70%
Weight 16g
Charging time / Using time free
Viewing distance free
color variation(ᇞuv) ±15
NETWORK
SIMPLINK (HDMI CEC) Yes
USB 2.0
Audio mp3
Picture jpeg
Video Codec DivX3.11, DivX4.12, DivX5.x, DivX6, Xvid1.00, Xvide1.01, Xvid1.02,
Xvid1.03, Xvid 1.10-beta-1/beta-2, Mpeg-1, Mpeg-2, Mpeg-4, H.264, AVC
Audio Codec AC3(Dolby Digital), EAC3, AAC, Mpeg, MP3, PCM
DivX Caption Fomat smi/*.srt/*.sub(MicroDVD, SubViewer1.0/2.0)/*.ass/*.ssa/*.txt
(TMPlayer)/*.psb(PowerDivx)
DiVX (SD/HD/HD Plus) Yes (HD)
SPECIAL
Smart Energy Saving Yes, Plus (Backlight Control+Intelligent Sensor)
Intelligent Sensor Yes
1080p Source Input HDMI 60p/50p/30p/24p Component 60p/50p
AV Input Navigation/ EZ Input searching Yes
Input Labeling Yes
Key Lock/ Child Lock Yes
EZ OSD (MENU SYSTEM)

Language EN/FR/TH/MA/IN/AR/HE/RU/Kurd/Far/VN/SP/PO
Quick Menu Aspect Ratio, Picture Mode, Sound Mode, Sleep Timer, Audio,
Energy Saving, AV Mode, Skip On/Off, USB Device
UI Version Yes (2010)
CHANNEL (PROGRAM)
Auto Tuning / Programming Yes
Program (Channel) Edit (Add / Delete) Yes
Program (Channel) Labeling (Name Edit) Yes
Favorite Channel Programming Yes
TIME/CLOCK
Auto/ Manual Clock Yes
On Time/ Off Time Yes
Sleep Timer Yes
Auto Off/ Auto Sleep Yes
CERTIFICATES
Supplier’s declaration
POTENTIALLY DANGEROUS MATERIALS IN THE SHIP’S STRUCTURE AND EQUIPMENT
(in pursuance of IMO Resolution A 962(23), adopted 5 December 2003)
Naval Electronics AB
Höjdrodergatan 18
S212 39 Malmö
Sweden
Community aerial system CAS

(Antennas, amplifiers and accessories from 2008-04-01)
Material declaration reference no:
POTENTIALLY DANGEROUS MATERIALS APPROXIMATE QUANTITY LOCATION REMARKS

1A. Asbestos: 0
1C. Plastic materials (Polyurethane foams): 1 kg Antenna
1D. Materials containing PCBs, PCTs, PBBs, at levels 0
of 50 mg/kg or more:
B-3 Cadmium and cadmium compounds
B-4 Hexavalent Chromium Compounds
B-5 Lead and lead compounds
B-6 Mercury and mercury compounds
B-8 Polybrominated biphenyl (PBBs)
B-9 Polybrominated dephenyl ethers (PBDEs)
Signature Date Malmö

2008.09.08
---------------------------------------------------------
Lars Risberg
Managing Director
H:\Administration\Suppliers declaration-2.doc
Postal address Visiting address Telephone E-Mail Board in Bank account Postal account
Naval Electronics AB Höjdrodergatan 18 +46-40-292045 Sales@naval.se Malmö 144-7762 66 47 42-4
Höjdrodergatan 18 Malmö Bankers Organisation no.
212 39 Malmö Sweden SE-banken 556157-9086
Declaration of conformity
We, the manufacturer
Höjdrodergatan 18
S212 39 Malmö
Sweden
Declare that the product
PSA 350 (1-3)

conform to the requirements of the following directive/directives:
89/336/EEC (EMC Directive)

2006/95/EC (LVD Directive)
Conformity is declared with relevant provisions of the following standards:
EN 60065:2002 and A1 CE marking of the product according to the Low Voltage Directive
IEC 60065:2002 and A1
EN 50 083-2:11.2001 Cable networks for television signals, sound signals and interactive
services-Part 2: Electromagnetic compability for equipment.
EN 61 000-3-2:2000 Electromagnetic compability (EMC) – Part 3-2: Limits for harmonic

current emissions (equipment input current up to and including 16 A
per phase).
EN 61 000-3-3:1995+A1:2001 Electromagnetic compability (EMC) – Part 3: Limits- Section 3: Limitation of

voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in public low-voltage supply
systems, for equipment with rated current up to 16 A per phase.
Signature Date Malmö

2008.04.22
---------------------------------------------------------
Lars Risberg
Managing Director
201170-Q2;02.doc
Postal address Visiting address Telephone Telefax Board in Bank account Postal account
Naval Electronics AB Höjdrodergatan 18 +46-40-292045 +46-40-187413 Malmö 144-7762 66 47 42-4
Declaration of conformity
We, the manufacturer
Höjdrodergatan 18
S212 39 Malmö
Sweden
Declare that the product

(description of the apparatus, system, installation to wich it refers)
N1 TVR OUTLET
conform to the requirements of the following directive/directives:
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC & 92/31/EEC
Conformity is declared with relevant provisions of the following standards:
EN 50 081-1 Generic emission standard Part 1: Residual, commercial and light industry
EN 50 082-1 Generic immunity standard Part 1: Residual, commercial and light industry
DIN V VDE 0855 Cabled distribution systems; Equipment for receiving and/or distribution from
part 10 sound and television signals
Signature Date
Malmö
1996.03.08
---------------------------------------------------------
Lars Risberg
Managing Director N1-conformity.doc
Postal address Visiting address Telephone Telefax Board in Bank account Postal account
Naval Electronics AB Höjdrodergatan 18 +46-40-292045 +46-40-187413 Malmö 144-7762 66 47 42-4
(dB)
LOSS CALCULATION
SIGNAL CALCULATION (dB) FOR 1ST & 2ND DECK-STBD
(REFERENCE FROM SINGLE LINE DRAWING OUTLETS DISTRIBUTION)
CABLE & SPLITTERS SIGNAL

LOCATION
TYPE DISTANCE (M) LOSS (dB) LEVEL (dB)
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
RG11/U 60 10.62
GYMNASIUM (106)
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 30 7.38
N1 - 3
TOTAL 11.5 88.5
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
RG11/U 60 10.62
2 MEN (203)
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 7 1.722
N1 - 3
TOTAL 5.842 94.158
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
RG11/U 60 10.62
2 MEN (204)
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 10 2.46
N1 - 3
TOTAL 6.58 93.42
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
RG11/U 60 10.62
2 MEN (216)
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 10 2.46
N1 - 3
TOTAL 6.58 93.42
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
RG11/U 60 10.62
TO4F-12 - 4.5
2 MEN (205)
RG11/U 11 1.947
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 9 2.214
N1 - 3
TOTAL 12.781 87.219
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
RG11/U 60 10.62
TO4F-12 - 4.5
2 MEN (206)
RG11/U 11 1.947
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 5 1.23
N1 - 3
TOTAL 11.797 88.203
Note : The dB calculation is based on estimated cable length. Page 1 of 17

SIGNAL CALCULATION (dB) FOR 1ST & 2ND DECK-STBD

LOCATION
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
RG11/U 60 10.62
TO4F-12 - 4.5
2 MEN (207)
RG11/U 11 1.947
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 9 2.214
N1 - 3
TOTAL 12.781 87.219
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
RG11/U 60 10.62
TO4F-12 - 4.5
2 MEN (214)
RG11/U 11 1.947
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 8 1.968
N1 - 3
TOTAL 12.535 87.465
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
RG11/U 60 10.62
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 11 1.947
2 MEN (208)
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 12 2.124
SP4F - 8
RG6/U 7 1.722
N1 - 3
TOTAL 14.413 85.587
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
RG11/U 60 10.62
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 11 1.947
2 MEN (209)
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 12 2.124
SP4F - 8
RG6/U 6 1.476
N1 - 3
TOTAL 14.167 85.833
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
RG11/U 60 10.62
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 11 1.947
2 MEN (210)
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 12 2.124
SP4F - 8
RG6/U 6 1.476
N1 - 3
TOTAL 14.167 85.833

SIGNAL CALCULATION (dB) FOR 1ST & 2ND DECK-PORT

LOCATION
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
SICK BAY (116) RG11/U 60 10.62
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 29 7.134
N1 - 3
TOTAL 19.254 80.746
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
2 MEN (219) RG11/U 60 10.62
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 9 2.214
N1 - 3
TOTAL 14.334 85.666
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
2 MEN (231) RG11/U 60 10.62
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 9 2.214
N1 - 3
TOTAL 14.334 85.666
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
2 MEN (232) RG11/U 60 10.62
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 7 1.722
N1 - 3
TOTAL 13.842 86.158
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 60 10.62
2 MEN (221) TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 10 1.77
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 10 2.46
N1 - 3
TOTAL 20.85 79.15


LOCATION
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 60 10.62
2 MEN (228) TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 10 1.77
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 22.08 77.92
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 60 10.62
2 MEN (229) TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 10 1.77
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 10 2.46
N1 - 3
TOTAL 20.85 79.15
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 60 10.62
2 MEN (230) TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 10 1.77
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 22.08 77.92
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 60 10.62
TO4F-12 - 4.5
2 MEN (225) RG11/U 10 1.77
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 15 2.655
SP4F - 8
RG6/U 10 2.46
N1 - 3
TOTAL 23.505 76.495


LOCATION
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 60 10.62
TO4F-12 - 4.5
2 MEN (226) RG11/U 10 1.77
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 15 2.655
SP4F - 8
RG6/U 10 2.46
N1 - 3
TOTAL 23.505 76.495
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 60 10.62
TO4F-12 - 4.5
2 MEN (227) RG11/U 10 1.77
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 15 2.655
SP4F - 8
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 24.735 75.265

SIGNAL CALCULATION (dB) FOR 3RD DECK-STBD

LOCATION
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
2 MEN (305) RG11/U 50 8.85
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 14.04 85.96
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
2 MEN (306) RG11/U 50 8.85
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 14.04 85.96
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
2 MEN (307) RG11/U 50 8.85
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 10 2.46
N1 - 3
TOTAL 12.81 87.19
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 50 8.85
2 MEN (308) TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 10 1.77
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 10 2.46
N1 - 3
TOTAL 19.08 80.92
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 50 8.85
2 MEN (309) TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 10 1.77
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 20.31 79.69

SIGNAL CALCULATION (dB) FOR 3RD DECK-STBD

LOCATION
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 50 8.85
RECREATION
TO4F-12 - 4.5
ROOM (315)
RG11/U 10 1.77
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 10 2.46
N1 - 3
TOTAL 19.08 80.92
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 50 8.85
TO4F-12 - 4.5
2 MEN (310) RG11/U 10 1.77
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 15 2.655
SP4F - 8
RG6/U 10 2.46
N1 - 3
TOTAL 21.735 78.265
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 50 8.85
TO4F-12 - 4.5
2 MEN (311) RG11/U 10 1.77
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 15 2.655
SP4F - 8
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 22.965 77.035
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 50 8.85
TO4F-12 - 4.5
2 MEN (312) RG11/U 10 1.77
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 15 2.655
SP4F - 8
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 22.965 77.035

SIGNAL CALCULATION (dB) FOR 3RD DECK-PORT

LOCATION
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
MESS HALL (316) RG11/U 40 7.08
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 25 6.15
N1 - 3
TOTAL 14.73 85.27
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
MOVIE ROOM (318) RG11/U 40 7.08
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 12.27 87.73
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
2 MEN (325) RG11/U 40 7.08
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 12.27 87.73
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 40 7.08
2 MEN (326) TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 10 1.77
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 18.54 81.46
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 40 7.08
2 MEN (327) TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 10 1.77
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 18.54 81.46


LOCATION
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 40 7.08
2 MEN (328) TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 10 1.77
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 18.54 81.46
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 40 7.08
TO4F-12 - 4.5
2 MEN (321) RG11/U 10 1.77
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 20 3.54
SP4F - 8
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 22.08 77.92
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 40 7.08
TO4F-12 - 4.5
2 MEN (322) RG11/U 10 1.77
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 20 3.54
SP4F - 8
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 22.08 77.92
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 40 7.08
TO4F-12 - 4.5
2 MEN (323) RG11/U 10 1.77
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 20 3.54
SP4F - 8
RG6/U 10 2.46
N1 - 3
TOTAL 20.85 79.15


LOCATION
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 40 7.08
TO4F-12 - 4.5
2 MEN (324) RG11/U 10 1.77
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 20 3.54
SP4F - 8
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 22.08 77.92
SIGNAL CALCULATION (dB) FOR 4TH DECK-STBD


LOCATION
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
2 MEN (403) RG11/U 35 6.195
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 11.385 88.615
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
2 MEN (404) RG11/U 35 6.195
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 11.385 88.615
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
2 MEN (405) RG11/U 35 6.195
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 11.385 88.615
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
2 MEN (406) RG11/U 35 6.195
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 11.385 88.615

SIGNAL CALCULATION (dB) FOR 4TH DECK-STBD

LOCATION
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 35 6.195
2 MEN (407) TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 15 2.655
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 18.54 81.46
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 35 6.195
2 MEN (408) TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 15 2.655
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 10 2.46
N1 - 3
TOTAL 17.31 82.69
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 35 6.195
2 MEN (409) TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 15 2.655
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 18.54 81.46
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 35 6.195
2 MEN (410) TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 15 2.655
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 18.54 81.46

LOSS CALCULATION (dB) FOR 4 DECK-CENTER

LOCATION
OF3581 - 8
RG11/U 25 4.425
READING ROOM
TO4F-12 - 12.5
(414)
RG6/U 18 4.428
N1 - 3
TOTAL 32.353 67.647
OF3581 - 8
RG11/U 25 4.425
OFFICE (417) TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 12 2.952
N1 - 3
TOTAL 30.877 69.123
OF3581 - 8
RG11/U 25 4.425
1 MAN (442) TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 10 2.46
N1 - 3
TOTAL 30.385 69.615
OF3581 - 8
RG11/U 25 4.425
1 MAN (443) TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 10 2.46
N1 - 3
TOTAL 30.385 69.615
OF3581 - 8
RG11/U 25 4.425
TO4F-12 - 4.5
OFFICE (418) RG11/U 15 2.655
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 38.77 61.23
OF3581 - 8
RG11/U 25 4.425
TO4F-12 - 4.5
OFFICE (419) RG11/U 15 2.655
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 38.77 61.23
OF3581 - 8
RG11/U 25 4.425
TO4F-12 - 4.5
COMPANY MAN
RG11/U 15 2.655
OFFICE (440)
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 38.77 61.23

LOSS CALCULATION (dB) FOR 4 DECK-CENTER

LOCATION
OF3581 - 8
RG11/U 25 4.425
TO4F-12 - 4.5
TOOL PUSHER
RG11/U 15 2.655
OFFICE (441)
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 38.77 61.23
OF3581 - 8
RG11/U 25 4.425
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 15 2.655
1 MAN (420) TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 15 2.655
SP4F - 8
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 41.425 58.575
OF3581 - 8
RG11/U 25 4.425
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 15 2.655
1 MAN (421) TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 15 2.655
SP4F - 8
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 41.425 58.575
OF3581 - 8
RG11/U 25 4.425
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 15 2.655
1 MAN (438) TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 15 2.655
SP4F - 8
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 41.425 58.575
OF3581 - 8
RG11/U 25 4.425
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 15 2.655
1 MAN (439) TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 15 2.655
SP4F - 8
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 41.425 58.575

SIGNAL CALCULATION (dB) FOR 4 DECK-PORT

LOCATION
OF3581 - 8
RG11/U 35 6.195
CONFERENCE
TO4F-12 - 12.5
ROOM (422)
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 33.385 66.615
OF3581 - 8
RG11/U 35 6.195
2 MEN (437) TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 20 4.92
N1 - 3
TOTAL 34.615 65.385
OF3581 - 8
RG11/U 35 6.195
TO4F-12 - 4.5
2 MEN (431) RG11/U 10 1.77
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 39.655 60.345
OF3581 - 8
RG11/U 35 6.195
TO4F-12 - 4.5
2 MEN (432) RG11/U 10 1.77
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 10 2.46
N1 - 3
TOTAL 38.425 61.575
OF3581 - 8
RG11/U 35 6.195
TO4F-12 - 4.5
2 MEN (433) RG11/U 10 1.77
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 39.655 60.345
OF3581 - 8
RG11/U 35 6.195
TO4F-12 - 4.5
2 MEN (434) RG11/U 10 1.77
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 39.655 60.345

SIGNAL CALCULATION (dB) FOR 4 DECK-PORT

LOCATION
OF3581 - 8
RG11/U 35 6.195
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 10 1.77
2 MEN (427) TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 15 2.655
SP4F - 8
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 42.31 57.69
OF3581 - 8
RG11/U 35 6.195
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 10 1.77
2 MEN (428) TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 15 2.655
SP4F - 8
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 42.31 57.69
OF3581 - 8
RG11/U 35 6.195
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 10 1.77
2 MEN (429) TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 15 2.655
SP4F - 8
RG6/U 10 2.46
N1 - 3
TOTAL 41.08 58.92
OF3581 - 8
RG11/U 35 6.195
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 10 1.77
2 MEN (430) TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 15 2.655
SP4F - 8
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 42.31 57.69

SIGNAL CALCULATION (dB) FOR 5TH DECK

LOCATION
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 35 6.195
HELICOPTER TO4F-12 - 4.5
WAITING ROOM RG11/U 15 2.655
(502) TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 50 8.85
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 31.89 68.11
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 35 6.195
RADIO & JACKING TO4F-12 - 4.5
CONTROL ROOM RG11/U 15 2.655
(503) TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 50 8.85
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 31.89 68.11
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 35 6.195
TO4F-12 - 4.5
OFFICE (510) RG11/U 15 2.655
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 50 8.85
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 30 7.38
N1 - 3
TOTAL 35.58 64.42
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 35 6.195
TO4F-12 - 4.5
OFFICE (509) RG11/U 15 2.655
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 50 8.85
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 30 7.38
N1 - 3
TOTAL 35.58 64.42

SIGNAL CALCULATION (dB) FOR 5TH DECK

LOCATION
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 35 6.195
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 15 2.655
2 MEN (511) TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 50 8.85
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 20 3.54
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 39.93 60.07
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 35 6.195
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 15 2.655
2 MEN (512) TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 50 8.85
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 20 3.54
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 39.93 60.07
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 35 6.195
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 15 2.655
2 MEN (513) TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 50 8.85
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 20 3.54
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 39.93 60.07
OF3581 - 8
PSA350 - -30
SP4F - 8
RG11/U 35 6.195
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 15 2.655
2 MEN (514) TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 50 8.85
TO4F-12 - 4.5
RG11/U 20 3.54
TO4F-12 - 12.5
RG6/U 15 3.69
N1 - 3
TOTAL 39.93 60.07

FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST
REPORTS
COMMISSIONING TEST
(SAT) PROCEDURES
COMMISSIONING / SAT PROCEDURE Doc : RS1571.01.SAT.005
SATELLITE TVRO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM Page : Page 1 of 14
HULL B337 PROJECT Issue : 01
REF : JU337045 Date : 20/09/2012
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HULL B337
MOBILE OFFSHORE DRILLING JACKUP RIG
COMMISSIONING TEST PROCEDURE (SAT)

SATELLITE TVRO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
RICO JOB / Ref. No. : JL0867P - RS-1571.01
01 20 Sep, 12 Separate Project as per Client’s request LB CKS CHEN

00 19 Oct, 11 Issued for Comments / Approval EI CKS CHEN
Rev. Date Description Prepared Checked Approved
REF : JU337045 Date : 20/09/2012
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1.0 INTRODUCTION……………………………………………………... 3
2.0 SYSTEM DATA……………………………….……………………… 3

2.1 SYSTEM LOCATION……………………………….………………... 3
2.2 REVIEW OF DOCUMENTATION…………………………………... 3
3.0 TEST PROCEDURES……………………………………………….. 4 - 11

3.1 SATELLITE TVRO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM….…………..…. 4 - 11
4.0 EQUIPMENT LIST AND SERIAL NUMBER…………………..…. 12
5.0 CORRECTIVE ACTION NOTES..………….………………………. 13
6.0 TESTING WITNESSED AND ACCEPTED.……………………….. 14

REF : JU337045 Date : 20/09/2012
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.0 INTRODUCTION
This document contains the Commissioning / Site Acceptance Test (SAT) procedure of Satellite TVRO
Entertainment System for the HULL B337 project. The scope of this document will cover the activities
and equipment provided by Rico (Pte) Ltd.
The purpose of the SAT is to carry out system functional test and commissioning. It details the agreed
system configuration, equipment required and methods used to attain the results.
Upon successful completion of this procedure, all of the relevant commissioning records shall be
completed and signed by vendor, client and customer representatives where applicable.
2.0 SYSTEM DATA
2.1 SYSTEM LOCATION
The Satellite TVRO Entertainment System Control Cabinet is installed in Radio / Jacking Control Room,
Level 5.
2.2 REVIEW OF DOCUMENTATION
All drawings, schematics and relevant documents to the system covered by these commissioning
procedures are listed below. It is to ensure that the latest information is being used and updated for
these test.
Title Drawing No.

Single Line Drawing – Entertainment System Distribution Network RS.1571.01.EBD.001
Internal Wiring – Entertainment System Distribution Network RS.1571.01.EIW.001
Panel Layout – Entertainment System Cabinet RS.1571.01.EPL.001
REF : JU337045 Date : 20/09/2012
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.0 TEST PROCEDURES
3.1 SATELLITE TVRO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
Results
No. Description
P F
3.1.1 Mechanical Check
Verify that the Satellite TVRO Entertainment System is interconnected and
1
installation in accordance with project documentation.
Inspect all items for: -
• Signs of external damage
2 • Loose connections
• Loose mountings
• Foreign objects/debris
Ensure mechanical commissioning and permits have been signed
3
off/completed prior to applying power to the system.
3.1.2 Power-up Test – Control Equipment
Verify the incoming voltage.
4
Main Supply 230VAC
Measure AC power before turned on unit.
Turn on the following units :
a) DVD Player
b) DVD Player
c) Central Control Unit
d) Modulator Power Supply Unit
• Modulator No.1
5 • Modulator No.2
• Modulator No.3
• Modulator No.4
• Modulator No.5
• Modulator No.6
• Modulator No.7
• Modulator No.8
e) Seatel 5004 (ADE Antenna Unit)
REF : JU337045 Date : 20/09/2012
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Results
No. Description
P F
3.1.3 DVD Player Testing
6 Show present operating status during power On.
Check the control buttons on the front panel of the DVD player and remote
7
control are all working.
8 Insert a DVD and press PLAY.
Ensure that a clear picture can be seen and undistorted audio can be heard
9
on the local TV Monitor.
Control Buttons
DVD Player Power Picture Audio
Player Remote
10
DVD Player No.1
DVD Player No.2
3.1.4 PAGA Cut-off Testing
Continue to monitor the Entertainment Display from the DVD Player on the
11
local TV Monitor.
Initiate a PAGA Emergency Speech announcement or Alarm on any of the
12
PAGA Access Panel, verify that the Entertainment Display is cut-off or muted.
At the end of announcement or canceling the alarm, ensure the Entertainment
13
Display is reinstated.
3.1.5 Seatel 5004 Ku-Band TVRO Antenna Checking
3.1.5.1 System Power-up
Turn ON the power switch on the front panel of the ACU. The 5004 Antenna
14 receives its DC power from the Antenna Control Unit (ACU) when the ACU is
energized.
3.1.5.2 Antenna Initialization
A functional operation check can be made on the antenna stabilization system
15
by observing its behavior during the 4 phases of initialization.
Step 1. Turn on the AC power switch at the ACU front panel. Verify the level
16 platform motor drives the level cage CCW to the stop and then CW 45
degrees.
Step 2. Verify the antenna moves forward or back to bring the top of the level
cage to a level position in the fore/aft direction. This step takes approximately
17
10 seconds and will result in the dish being at 45 degrees in elevation. The
level cage may still be tilted left or right at this time.
REF : JU337045 Date : 20/09/2012
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Results
No. Description
P F
Step 3. After the level cage is positioned in the fore/aft direction, verify the
18 antenna moves left or right to bring the top of the level cage to a level position
in the left/right direction. This step also takes approximately 10 seconds.
Step 4. After the level cage is positioned in the left/right direction, verify the
antenna moves CW (up) in azimuth to the upper stop where the Relative
19 position of the antenna will be 700.0 degrees. From this point on the encoder
will increment and/or decrement the Relative position of the antenna. Next,
the antenna will drive CCW (down) in azimuth to a Relative position of 630.0.
The antenna will report its status, the PCUs model number & software version
20 and the position information (current Relative, Azimuth and Elevation) to the
ACU.
3.1.5.3 ACU / Antenna System Check
Press RESET on the ACU front panel to initialize the system. Verify the
display shows "SEA TELINC - MASTER" and the ACU software version
number. Wait 10 seconds for the display to change to "SEA TEL INC -
REMOTE" and the PCU software version number. If the display shows
21
"REMOTE INITIALIZING” wait for approximately 2 minutes for the antenna to
complete initialization and report the Antenna Model and PCU software
version. If “REMOTE NOT RESPONDING" is displayed, refer to the
Troubleshooting Section of the manual.
Press the NEXT key repeatedly to display the Ship, Satellite, Antenna and
22 Status menu displays. This verifies that the displays change in the correct
response to the keys.
3.1.5.4 Latitude/Longitude (GPS) Auto-Update check
Press the NEXT key repeatedly to display the Ship menu. Press ENTER to
23
access edit mode and view the current Latitude value.
Press the LEFT arrow key to bring the cursor up under the ones digit, press
UP and then hit ENTER. The display should immediately show a latitude
24
value one degree higher, but then will be overwritten within several seconds
(back to the previous value) by the GPS engine.
25 This test does not need to be repeated in the Longitude menu.
3.1.5.5 Ship Heading – Gyro Compass Following Check
Press the NEXT key repeatedly to display the Ship menu. If the boat is
underway, monitor the Heading value to verify that the display changes in the
26
correct response to the Gyro Compass input (Heading value should always be
exactly the same as the Gyro Compass repeater value).
REF : JU337045 Date : 20/09/2012
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Results
No. Description
P F
If the boat is NOT underway, loosen the mooring lines enough to allow the
ship to turn a few degrees at the pier. Monitor the Heading value to verify that
27 the display changes in the correct response to the Gyro Compass input
(Heading value should always be exactly the same as the Gyro Compass
repeater value).
3.1.5.6 Satellite Tracking
Press the NEXT key until the main Satellite menu is displayed. This is the
28
display of the current Satellite information.
Press ENTER to begin edit mode and access the Satellite Longitude entry
29 menu. Satellite longitude is used to calculate antenna Elevation, Azimuth and
Polarity pointing angles.
To manually update, press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key to bring the cursor
up under the tenths digit to the left, or the E/W character to the right
30 respectively. Continue to move the cursor until the desired character to be
edited is underscored (selected). Use the UP or DOWN arrow keys to
increment or decrement the selected character.
Range of acceptable latitude values is 000.0 East to 180.0 East/West to000.0
West, however longitude may be entered as 000.0-359.9 East if you prefer
31 (181.0 East is the same as 179.0 West). Tenths may be entered (and will be
used internally) but the main Ship display will round off to nearest whole
degree.
When the hemisphere character is selected press the UP or the DOWN key to
32
toggle East/West hemisphere.
Press ENTER to set the new longitude and return to longitude display. The
ACU will then calculate the Elevation, Azimuth and Polarization that the
33 antenna will be driven to, based on the current SHIP information (LAT, LON&
HDG) and issue those (AZ, EL & POL) targeting values to the antenna. Auto-
Threshold will re-set as the antenna targets.
REF : JU337045 Date : 20/09/2012
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Results
No. Description
P F
3.1.6 Outlets Distribution Checking
With the DVD disc still playing, measure the signal level at all TV Outlets to read the
34
acceptance range from 70dBμV ±12dBμV.
Level
No. Outlets Location
(dBμV)
1ST & 2ND DECK - STBD
1 N1 Gymnasium (106)
2 N1 2 Men (216)
3 N1 2 Men (203)
4 N1 2 Men (204)
5 N1 2 Men (205)
6 N1 2 Men (206)
7 N1 2 Men (207)
8 N1 2 Men (214)
9 N1 2 Men (208)
10 N1 2 Men (209)
11 N1 2 Men (210)
35 1ST & 2ND DECK - PORT
12 N1 Sick Bay (116)
13 N1 2 Men (219)
14 N1 2 Men (231)
15 N1 2 Men (232)
16 N1 2 Men (221)
17 N1 2 Men (230)
18 N1 2 Men (229)
19 N1 2 Men (228)
20 N1 2 Men (225)
21 N1 2 Men (227)
22 N1 2 Men (226)
3RD DECK - STBD
23 N1 2 Men (305)
24 N1 2 Men (306)
REF : JU337045 Date : 20/09/2012
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Results
No. Description
P F
Level
(dBμV)
25 N1 2 Men (307)
26 N1 2 Men (308)
27 N1 2 Men (309)
28 N1 2 Men (315)
29 N1 2 Men (310)
30 N1 2 Men (311)
31 N1 2 Men (312)
3RD DECK - PORT
32 N1 Mess Hall (316)
33 N1 Movie Rm (318)
34 N1 2 Men (325)
35 N1 2 Men (328)
35 36 N1 2 Men (327)
37 N1 2 Men (326)
38 N1 2 Men (324)
39 N1 2 Men (323)
40 N1 2 Men (322)
41 N1 2 Men (321)
4TH DECK - STBD
42 N1 2 Men (403)
43 N1 2 Men (404)
44 N1 2 Men (405)
45 N1 2 Men (406)
46 N1 2 Men (407)
47 N1 2 Men (408)
48 N1 2 Men (409)
49 N1 2 Men (410)
REF : JU337045 Date : 20/09/2012
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Results
No. Description
P F
Level
(dBμV)
4TH DECK - CENTER
50 N1 1 Man (442)
51 N1 1 Man (443)
52 N1 Reading Rm (414)
53 N1 Office (417)
54 N1 Company Man Off. (440)
55 N1 Tool Pusher Off. (441)
56 N1 Office (418)
57 N1 Office (419)
58 N1 1 Man (438)
59 N1 1 Man (439)
60 N1 1 Man (420)
61 N1 1 Man (421)
35 4TH DECK - PORT
62 N1 2 Men (437)
63 N1 Conference Rm (422)
64 N1 2 Men (434)
65 N1 2 Men (433)
66 N1 2 Men (432)
67 N1 2 Men (431)
68 N1 2 Men (430)
69 N1 2 Men (429)
70 N1 2 Men (428)
71 N1 2 Men (427)
5TH DECK
72 N1 Office (510)
73 N1 Helicopter Waiting Rm (502)
74 N1 Office (509)
75 N1 Radio & Jacking Control Rm (503)
REF : JU337045 Date : 20/09/2012
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Results
No. Description
P F
Level
(dBμV)
76 N1 2 Men (512)
35
77 N1 2 Men (511)
78 N1 2 Men (513)
79 N1 2 Men (514)
REF : JU337045 Date : 20/09/2012
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.0 EQUIPMENT LIST AND SERIAL NUMBER
No. Description Manufacturer Model Serial Number

1 Antenna Unit Seatel 5004
2 Antenna Control Unit Seatel DAC-2200
REF : JU337045 Date : 20/09/2012
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.0 CORRECTIVE ACTION NOTES
Item
Failure / Requirement Description Agreed Action
No.
REF : JU337045 Date : 20/09/2012
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.0 TESTING WITNESSED AND ACCEPTANCE
The tests described within this procedure were performed in the presence of the following person:
1) Company :
Title :
Name :
Signature :
Date :
2) Company :
Title :
Name :
Signature :
Date :
3) Company :
Title :
Name :
Signature :
Date :
4) Company :
Title :
Name :
Signature :
Date :
5) Company :
Title :
Name :
Signature :
Date :

Hull B337 - Final Documentation For Entertainment System (Sent On 2-10-12)

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Hull B337 - Final Documentation For Entertainment System (Sent On 2-10-12)

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

VENDOR’S DATA BOOK

CUSTOMER : KEPPEL FELS LIMITED

RICO (PTE) LTD

3.00)) TECHNICAL DATA

3.01) MARINE STABILIZED TVRO SYSTEM

3.03) ANTENNA CONTROL UNIT

3.04) HIGH QUALITY CATV VSB RF MODULATOR

3.05) PWER SUPPLY & BASE UNIT

3.06) 12-WAYS PASSIVE COMBINER

3.09) AM-FM-BI AMPLIFIER

3.10) OUT PUT FILTER

3.11) POWER SUPPLY

3.00) TECHNICAL DATA

3.12) POWER SUPPLY AND AMPLIFIER

3.13) SWITCH MODE POWER SUPPLY

3.14) POWER PASS SPLITTER

3 15) DVD PLAYER

3.16) DOUBLE ISOLATED TV/RADIO OUTLETS

3.17) TAP OFF

3.19) 47 INCH LED 3D TV RECEIVER

5.00) LOSS CALCULATION

6.00) FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST REPORTS

7.00) COMMISSIONING TEST (SAT) PROCEDURES

Set Code : HULL B337 - ENTERTAINMENT SYS Category : AAA

Below Deck Unit

(Abv items 2 - 5 are built into

06) 1 x 123026 Customer Doc Kit

Consisting of the following built-in items :-

12 Ways Passive Combiner

- 1 x Naval A3540 TV-Amplifier

(All abv items are built into

- 2 x Samsung Model E350/XS

04) 1 x User Manual

- 9063-01 Mounting Box

05) Miscellaneous Accessories

- 8 x Naval Model SP4F (201555)

- 1 x Naval Model SP2F (201556)

Std Unit Price : 0.00 Total Item Qty : 451

SEA TEL MODEL

2008 Data Sheet

The most important thing we build is trust

The Model 5004 TV-at-Sea Antenna Specifications

• Azimuth Range: 680 degrees

• Full Elevation Range: -15º to +120º

• Polarization Control: Automatic where required

• Tracking System: Dishscan (no rotating feed)

• More than 200 digital quality TV channels and over 30

• The 04 Series antennas are compatible with the services

• All Sea Tel DBS TV-at-Sea™ systems accommodate any

• Unmatched stabilization accuracy allows the system to

• 2-year warranty on parts; 1-year labor.

• Ready for multiple satellite selection.

• Euro version is HD ready/ US version requires the HD

For further information please contact:

126897_B 10/08 www.cobham.com/seatel

 Min. EIRP: 40.5 dBW

WARNING: Antenna Pedestal must be properly restrained (stowed)

Sea Tel, Inc. Sea Tel Europe

The Series 04 Family of Marine Stabilized Antenna Pedestals with DAC-2200

REV ECO# Date Description By

X N/A Initial PRELIMINARY Release MDN

A N/A September 10, 2004 Production Release MDN

1. INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................. 1-1